IBM Lotus Symphony
-
Upload
skraman1986 -
Category
Documents
-
view
906 -
download
10
Transcript of IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony
Contents
1. What's new in Lotus Symphony 32. IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
2.1. Entering text quickly2.1.1. Inserting an Entire Text Document2.1.2. Navigating and selecting with the keyboard2.1.3. Using the direct cursor2.1.4. Inserting graphics
2.1.4.1. Inserting a Graphic From a File2.1.4.2. Inserting graphics from Presentations2.1.4.3. Inserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-Drop2.1.4.4. Inserting a Scanned Image2.1.4.5. Inserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
2.2. Spell checking and finding synonyms2.2.1. Automatically Check Spelling2.2.2. Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary2.2.3. Checking spelling in other languages2.2.4. Checking spelling manually
2.3. Working with tables in documents2.3.1. Adjusting number recognition in tables2.3.2. Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard2.3.3. Deleting tables or the contents of a table2.3.4. Adding tables2.3.5. Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page2.3.6. Resizing rows and columns2.3.7. Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard
2.4. Putting objects in documents2.4.1. Positioning Objects2.4.2. Wrapping Text Around Objects
2.5. Using sections and frames2.5.1. Using Sections2.5.2. Editing Sections2.5.3. Inserting Sections
2.6. Creating tables of contents or indexes2.6.1. Setting outline numbering for paragraph styles2.6.2. Creating a user-defined index2.6.3. Creating a table of contents2.6.4. Creating Alphabetical Indexes2.6.5. Indexes Covering Several Documents2.6.6. Editing or deleting entries2.6.7. Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents2.6.8. Adding index entries2.6.9. Assigning style attributes to index levels
2.7. Navigating text documents2.7.1. Arranging Chapters in the Navigator2.7.2. Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator2.7.3. Navigator for Text Documents
2.8. Viewing Fields2.8.1. Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field2.8.2. Converting a Field into Text
2.9. Creating styles2.9.1. Templates and Styles2.9.2. Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages2.9.3. Creating and applying page styles2.9.4. Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page2.9.5. Using Styles From Another Document or Template2.9.6. Creating new styles from selections2.9.7. Updating Styles From Selections
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
1 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.9.8. Creating a Document Template2.9.9. Changing the Default Template2.9.10. Applying Styles in Fill Style Mode
2.10. Formatting text documents2.10.1. Changing the Case of Text2.10.2. Hiding Text2.10.3. Defining different headers and footers2.10.4. Inserting a chapter name and number in a header or footer2.10.5. Quickly Applying Paragraph Styles2.10.6. Applying Text Formatting While You Type2.10.7. Resetting Font Attributes2.10.8. Using frames to center text on a page2.10.9. Emphasizing text2.10.10. Rotating text in Documents2.10.11. Working with page breaks2.10.12. Making Text Superscript or Subscript2.10.13. Adding bullets2.10.14. Adding numbering
2.10.14.1. Adding chapter numbers to captions2.10.14.2. Creating numbered or bulleted lists as you type2.10.14.3. Saving Docuemnts in other formats2.10.14.4. Changing the outline level of numbered and bulleted lists2.10.14.5. Combining numbered lists2.10.14.6. Adding line numbers2.10.14.7. Modifying numbering in a numbered list2.10.14.8. Defining number ranges2.10.14.9. Numbering and numbering styles
2.11. Master Documents and Subdocuments2.12. Inserting Cross-References2.13. Merging fields into documents
2.13.1. Specifying the location of Lotus Notes for Mail Merge2.13.2. Creating an envelope2.13.3. Setting envelope options2.13.4. Specifying envelope print settings
2.14. Previewing a Page Before Printing2.15. Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet2.16. Selecting Printer Paper Trays2.17. Searching and replacing
2.17.1. Using wildcards in text searches2.18. Docking and Resizing Windows2.19. Counting Words2.20. Using shortcut keys
2.20.1. Shortcut keys for Lotus Symphony writer2.21. Calculating with documents
2.21.1. Calculating Across Tables2.21.2. Using calculations in documents2.21.3. Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document2.21.4. Calculating the sum of a series of table cells2.21.5. Using calculations in tables
2.22. Menus and toolbars in Documents2.22.1. Menus in Documents
2.22.1.1. File menu in Documents2.22.1.2. Using the Edit menu in documents2.22.1.3. Controlling the on-screen display2.22.1.4. Create menu in Documents2.22.1.5. Formatting the layout of documents2.22.1.6. Tools in Documents2.22.1.7. Window menu in Documents
2.22.2. Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents2.22.2.1. Context Sensitive bar in Documents
2.22.2.1.1. Text Object bar in Documents2.22.2.1.2. Numbering Object bar
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
2 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.22.2.1.3. Graphic Object bar in Documents2.22.2.1.4. Table Object bar in Documents2.22.2.1.5. OLE Object bar in Documents2.22.2.1.6. Drawing object bar in Documents2.22.2.1.7. Form Object bar in Documents2.22.2.1.8. Print preview bar in Documents
2.22.2.2. Opening the drawing bar in Documents2.22.2.3. Editing bar2.22.2.4. File bar in Documents2.22.2.5. Forms bar
2.23. Creating a nested table2.24. Setting bullets and numbering in multiple table cells2.25. Documents: Reference
2.25.1. Attributes2.25.2. Text Format (Search)2.25.3. Setting automatic word completion options2.25.4. Line Style2.25.5. Caption Dialog2.25.6. Working with Graphics2.25.7. Main Toolbar2.25.8. IBM Lotus Symphony Documents Toolbar Set 22.25.9. Using the navigator toolbar in Documents2.25.10. Editing the properties of a field in documents2.25.11. Editing the footnote and endnote in documents2.25.12. Edit Sections2.25.13. Field Shadings2.25.14. Switching the display of field names and field contents2.25.15. Displaying formatting symbols in Documents2.25.16. Hidden Paragraphs2.25.17. Adding manual breaks2.25.18. Insert Section2.25.19. Adding sections2.25.20. Indents2.25.21. Inserting footnote and endnote in documents2.25.22. Create Document Bookmark2.25.23. Add Caption2.25.24. Inserting other fields such as document information2.25.25. Document2.25.26. Creating cross-references and bookmarks2.25.27. Inserting references to indexes and tables2.25.28. Creating an index2.25.29. Adding the chapter number to the caption label2.25.30. Styles2.25.31. Index/Table2.25.32. Setting options for alphabetical index2.25.33. Setting options for illustration index2.25.34. Setting options for index of tables2.25.35. Setting options for user-defined index2.25.36. Setting options for table of objects2.25.37. Assign Styles2.25.38. Entries (indexes/tables)2.25.39. Entries (table of contents)2.25.40. Entries (alphabetical index)2.25.41. Entries (illustration index)2.25.42. Entries (index of tables)2.25.43. Entries (user-defined index)2.25.44. Entries (table of objects)2.25.45. Frame2.25.46. Create Table2.25.47. Footer2.25.48. Inserting fields into documents2.25.49. Setting pagination options
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
3 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.50. Drop Caps2.25.51. Outline & Numbering2.25.52. Setting up page formatting in Documents2.25.53. Setting columns properties for a page, frame, or section2.25.54. Setting properties for sections in documents2.25.55. Setting footnote layout options2.25.56. Specifying the position of footnotes and endnotes2.25.57. Text Grid2.25.58. Graphic properties2.25.59. Type2.25.60. Setting wrap properties2.25.61. Contour Editor2.25.62. Graphics2.25.63. Assigning macro for objects in documents2.25.64. Setting hyperlink properties for objects in documents2.25.65. Setting properties for objects in documents2.25.66. Changing properties for an object in documents2.25.67. Setting table properties2.25.68. Setting table properties in documents2.25.69. Setting rows and columns in tables2.25.70. Setting text flow before and after the table2.25.71. Cell2.25.72. Merge cells2.25.73. Split Cells2.25.74. Protect2.25.75. Unprotect2.25.76. Top2.25.77. Center2.25.78. Aligning the cell to bottom in a table2.25.79. Row2.25.80. Changing the row height of tables2.25.81. Optimal Height2.25.82. Selecting the row that contains the cursor2.25.83. Delete Rows2.25.84. Spacing Rows Equally2.25.85. Setting column properties in a table2.25.86. Column Width2.25.87. Optimal Width2.25.88. Selecting the column that contains the cursor2.25.89. Delete Columns2.25.90. Spacing Columns Equally2.25.91. Styles in Documents2.25.92. Paragraph Style Setup2.25.93. Character Style2.25.94. Frame Style Setup2.25.95. Numbering Style2.25.96. Condition2.25.97. Applying formatting style2.25.98. Instant Changes2.25.99. While Typing2.25.100. Instant Formatting for Tables2.25.101. Applying instant changes2.25.102. Apply and Edit Changes2.25.103. Setting text wrap options for objects2.25.104. Merge Tables2.25.105. Setting outline numbering in documents2.25.106. Setting numbering in documents2.25.107. Footnote and Endnote Settings2.25.108. Footnotes2.25.109. Endnotes2.25.110. Converting between text and a table2.25.111. Sort
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
4 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.112. Calculate2.25.113. Page Formatting2.25.114. Current Index2.25.115. All Indexes and Tables2.25.116. Line Numbers2.25.117. Update All2.25.118. Updating the content of fields2.25.119. Links2.25.120. All Charts2.25.121. Update2.25.122. Working with headers and footers2.25.123. Numbering On/Off2.25.124. Link2.25.125. Unlink Frames2.25.126. Create Row2.25.127. Create Column2.25.128. Sum function2.25.129. Insert Unnumbered Entry2.25.130. Move Up with Subpoints2.25.131. Move Down with Subpoints2.25.132. Restart Numbering2.25.133. Page Number2.25.134. Hyperlink Mode2.25.135. Using the zoom in function in Documents2.25.136. Using the zoom out function in Documents2.25.137. Preview Zoom2.25.138. Print Preview: Two Pages2.25.139. Print Preview: Multiple Pages2.25.140. Print page view2.25.141. Print Options2.25.142. Formula2.25.143. Cancel the formula input line2.25.144. Apply in formula input line2.25.145. Formula Area2.25.146. Using the create icons on the toolbar in IBM Lotus Symphony Documents2.25.147. Inserting fields in Documents2.25.148. Inserting the date as a field in documents2.25.149. Time as a field2.25.150. Inserting page number as a field in documents2.25.151. Page Count2.25.152. Direct Cursor On/Off2.25.153. Drawing tables2.25.154. Erasing tables2.25.155. Word Count2.25.156. Page Numbers2.25.157. Adding Exceptions to the Instant Changes List2.25.158. Automatic Functions in Documents2.25.159. Adjusting instant correction formatting2.25.160. Adding captions2.25.161. Editing Text2.25.162. Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions2.25.163. Inserting page numbers in headers or footers2.25.164. Adding footnotes or endnotes2.25.165. Spacing Between Footnotes2.25.166. Formatting headers or footers2.25.167. Importing Lists From Other Text Programs2.25.168. Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page2.25.169. Going to Specific Bookmark2.25.170. Line Number and Character Offset2.25.171. Instructions for Using IBM Lotus Symphony Documents2.25.172. Structuring a Lotus Symphony Documents2.25.173. Numbered Lists
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
5 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.174. Printing Documents2.25.175. Printing in Reverse Order2.25.176. Reference2.25.177. Modifying Cross-References2.25.178. Removing Line Breaks2.25.179. Sections in IBM Lotus Symphony Documents2.25.180. Special IBM Lotus Symphony Documents Features2.25.181. Checking spelling in Documents2.25.182. Turning off Bullets or Numbering2.25.183. Structuring a Page2.25.184. Editing a Table with Header Set2.25.185. Animating Text2.25.186. Adding or deleting a row or a column2.25.187. Assigning hyperlinks to entries in a table of contents2.25.188. Inserting name of the author as a field2.25.189. Book preview2.25.190. Cell Reference2.25.191. Changing Page Background2.25.192. Changing Page Orientation2.25.193. Combine paragraphs2.25.194. Creating Non-printing Text2.25.195. Creating documents2.25.196. Defining background colors or background graphics in documents2.25.197. Defining borders for objects in Documents2.25.198. Defining Borders for Pages2.25.199. Defining Conditions2.25.200. Displaying Hidden Text2.25.201. DocInformation2.25.202. Edit Concordance File2.25.203. Edit Index Entry2.25.204. Editing Tables Using the Keyboard2.25.205. File Menu2.25.206. Finding and Replacing in Lotus Symphony Documents2.25.207. Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents2.25.208. Setting Envelope Options2.25.209. Functions2.25.210. Graphics On/Off2.25.211. Header2.25.212. Indent with Subpoint2.25.213. Indenting Paragraphs2.25.214. Setting options for table of contents2.25.215. Input Field2.25.216. Insert (File)2.25.217. Index Entry2.25.218. Insert Menu2.25.219. Inserting a table from a spreadsheet2.25.220. Load Styles2.25.221. Merging and Splitting Table Cells2.25.222. Navigation2.25.223. Displaying the normal view of documents2.25.224. Setting position and size, text properties, and fontwork effects for objects2.25.225. Working with page numbers2.25.226. Displaying print preview in Documents2.25.227. Envelope Print Settings2.25.228. Printing Register-true2.25.229. Printing a Brochure2.25.230. Protecting Content in Lotus Symphony Documents2.25.231. Moving Frames, Objects With the Keyboard2.25.232. Displaying ruler in Documents2.25.233. Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns2.25.234. Selection Mode2.25.235. Split Table
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
6 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.236. Subject2.25.237. Table commands2.25.238. Table: Fixed2.25.239. Table: Fixed, Proportional2.25.240. Table: Variable2.25.241. Tables2.25.242. Text Animation2.25.243. Title as field2.25.244. User Defined Borders in Text Documents2.25.245. Using Rulers2.25.246. Using content recognizer2.25.247. Variables2.25.248. View menu in Documents2.25.249. Word Completion for Text Documents2.25.250. Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments2.25.251. Creating a new text document2.25.252. Select Table2.25.253. Auto Text2.25.254. Using AutoText
3. IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations3.1. Creating presentations3.2. Using Shortcut Keys in IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations3.3. Keyboard navigation in Presentations3.4. Showing a Slide Show3.5. Viewing and printing presentations
3.5.1. Viewing Presentation3.5.1.1. Creating a custom screen show3.5.1.2. Changing the Slide Order3.5.1.3. Zooming With the Keypad3.5.1.4. Recording a screen show
3.6. Printing faster with Reduced Data3.7. Command and menu reference
3.7.1. Menus of Presentations3.7.1.1. File menu in Presentations3.7.1.2. Edit menu in Lotus Symphony Presentations3.7.1.3. View menu in Presentations3.7.1.4. Create3.7.1.5. Layout3.7.1.6. Tools3.7.1.7. Window menu in Presentations3.7.1.8. Presentation
3.7.2. Toolbar in Presentations3.7.2.1. Bézier bar3.7.2.2. Context Sensitive bar in Presentations
3.7.2.2.1. Graphic Object bar3.7.2.2.2. Table Object bar in Presentations3.7.2.2.3. OLE Object bar3.7.2.2.4. Drawing Object bar3.7.2.2.5. Form Object bar in Presentations3.7.2.2.6. Chart Editing bar in Presentations3.7.2.2.7. Outline View bar3.7.2.2.8. Slide Sorter View bar
3.7.2.3. Opening the drawing bar in Presentations/title>3.7.2.4. File bar in Presentations3.7.2.5. Forms bar in Presentations3.7.2.6. Glue Points bar
3.8. Loading, saving, importing, and exporting3.8.1. Saving Presentations in other formats3.8.2. Copying Slides From Other Presentations
3.9. Selecting and moving objects3.10. Creating Curves, Polygons, and 3-D Objects from 2-D Objects3.11. Formatting
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
7 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
3.11.1. Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Lists3.11.2. Changing the Slide Background Fill3.11.3. Adding headers or footers in a presentation3.11.4. Applying a slide template to a slide Master
3.12. Printing3.12.1. Printing Presentations3.12.2. Printing a slide to fit a paper size
3.13. Effects3.13.1. Exporting Animations in GIF Format3.13.2. Animating objects in slides3.13.3. Adding animated slide transitions3.13.4. Creating animated GIF images
3.14. Objects, graphics, and bitmaps3.14.1. Creating graphical objects from text characters3.14.2. Creating vector graphics from bitmap images3.14.3. Loading Line and Arrow Styles3.14.4. Including Spreadsheets in Slides3.14.5. Moving Objects3.14.6. Creating a flowchart
3.15. Working with lines, curves, headers, footers, and graphics3.15.1. Inserting bitmap images3.15.2. Copying formatting with duplicate formatting in Presentations3.15.3. Undoing direct formatting in a Document3.15.4. Creating stylized text3.15.5. Drawing Bézier curves3.15.6. Adjusting curves3.15.7. Using Gluepoints3.15.8. Applying line styles using the Toolbar in Presentations3.15.9. Defining Line Ends
3.16. Presentations: Reference3.16.1. Favorites3.16.2. Geometry3.16.3. Shading3.16.4. Illumination3.16.5. Textures in Presentations3.16.6. Material3.16.7. Eyedropper3.16.8. 3D Settings3.16.9. Using the template organizer3.16.10. Current Size3.16.11. Decrease Font3.16.12. Increase Font3.16.13. Slide View Bar3.16.14. Rulers3.16.15. Drawing bar in Presentations3.16.16. Presentations3.16.17. Creating a screen show3.16.18. Saving a presentation as a template3.16.19. Insert Slide from File3.16.20. Slide Thumbnails3.16.21. Background Fill3.16.22. Page Properties3.16.23. Background3.16.24. Using the navigator toolbar in Presentations3.16.25. Duplicate3.16.26. Delete Slide3.16.27. Edit Fields in Presentations3.16.28. Displaying Rulers3.16.29. Normal View in Presentations3.16.30. Switching views3.16.31. Handout Slide3.16.32. Screen Show
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
8 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
3.16.33. Master3.16.34. Slide Master View3.16.35. Title master properties3.16.36. Notes Master3.16.37. Handouts3.16.38. Color and Grayscale3.16.39. Workspace3.16.40. Creating a new slide3.16.41. Snap Point/Line3.16.42. Edit Guide Line3.16.43. Duplicate Slide3.16.44. Expand Slide3.16.45. Summary Slide3.16.46. Fields in Presentations3.16.47. Date (fixed)3.16.48. Date (variable)3.16.49. Time (fixed)3.16.50. Time (variable)3.16.51. Slide Number3.16.52. Style List in Presentations3.16.53. Applying formatting styles3.16.54. Slide Templates3.16.55. Changing the layout of a slide3.16.56. IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations Styles for Outlines3.16.57. Graphics styles3.16.58. IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations Style3.16.59. Background object3.16.60. Drawing Object Background3.16.61. Arrange3.16.62. Styles in Presentations3.16.63. Slide Transition3.16.64. Setting instant correction options in Presentations3.16.65. Instant Corrections Entries3.16.66. Specifying exceptions in Presentations3.16.67. Specifying replacement characters for quotation marks in Presentations3.16.68. Image Animation3.16.69. Defining screen show settings3.16.70. Custom Slide Shows3.16.71. Define Custom Screen Show3.16.72. Convert3.16.73. To Curve3.16.74. To Polygon3.16.75. Convert to 3D3.16.76. Convert to 3D Rotation Object3.16.77. To Bitmap3.16.78. To metafile3.16.79. To Contour3.16.80. Combine objects3.16.81. Split3.16.82. Connect3.16.83. Applying Animation Effects3.16.84. Creating a master slide3.16.85. Presentation Header and Footer3.16.86. Import Slide Templates3.16.87. Order of Animation Effects3.16.88. Presentation Slide Transition3.16.89. Hide Slide3.16.90. Slide Effects3.16.91. Transition Speed3.16.92. Screen show transition time3.16.93. Rehearse Timings3.16.94. Current Size in Presentations
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
9 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
3.16.95. Current Slide3.16.96. Mode3.16.97. Text Box3.16.98. Rectangles3.16.99. Ellipse3.16.100. Lines3.16.101. 3D Objects3.16.102. Creating in Presentations3.16.103. Arrows3.16.104. 3D Effects3.16.105. Formatting On/Off3.16.106. Black and White View3.16.107. Show Snap Lines3.16.108. Exit all Groups3.16.109. Snap3.16.110. Header and Footer3.16.111. Customize the format and position of header and footer3.16.112. Play from Current Slide3.16.113. Command Reference in Presentations3.16.114. Formatting in Presentations3.16.115. Hiding slides3.16.116. Importing3.16.117. Instructions for Using Lotus Symphony Lotus Symphony Presentations3.16.118. Setting print options in Presentations3.16.119. Setting a screen show to automatically repeat3.16.120. Creating a new presentation from a template3.16.121. Text in presentation3.16.122. Viewing3.16.123. Deleting a table3.16.124. Merging table cells3.16.125. Inserting rows or columns3.16.126. Resizing a table3.16.127. Selecting in a table or cells in a table3.16.128. Split the cells3.16.129. Working with tables in Presentations3.16.130. Changing the properties of a table3.16.131. Allow Interaction3.16.132. In Front of Object3.16.133. Behind Object3.16.134. Allow Quick Editing3.16.135. Animation Effects Pane3.16.136. Animation Effects3.16.137. Inserting User Data3.16.138. Break in Presentations3.16.139. Clicking an object to change slides3.16.140. Connectors3.16.141. Connectors toolbar3.16.142. Create Menu in Presentations3.16.143. Dimensioning3.16.144. Edit Menu in Presentations3.16.145. Effect Options3.16.146. Effect3.16.147. Export in Presentations3.16.148. File name3.16.149. Glue Points3.16.150. Grid in Presentations3.16.151. Header and Footer in Presentations3.16.152. Hide Subpoints3.16.153. Insert File3.16.154. Insert Slides/Objects3.16.155. Insert Text3.16.156. Intersect
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
10 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
3.16.157. Large Handles3.16.158. Merge contents of one object with another3.16.159. Modify Object with Attributes3.16.160. Notes Master Layout3.16.161. Notes View3.16.162. Slide Sorter View3.16.163. Slide Thumbnail3.16.164. Presentation Menu3.16.165. Reverse3.16.166. Select Text Area Only3.16.167. Shapes3.16.168. Show Subpoints3.16.169. Simple Handles3.16.170. Slides Per Row3.16.171. Snap to Object Border3.16.172. Snap to Object Points3.16.173. Snap to Page Margins3.16.174. Subtract3.16.175. Table insertion3.16.176. Animating paragraphs3.16.177. Timing3.16.178. View Menu3.16.179. New Presentation3.16.180. Easier access in IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations3.16.181. Multi-monitor display3.16.182. Sidebar3.16.183. Renaming a Master Slide3.16.184. Deleting a Master Slide3.16.185. Displaying background of Master3.16.186. Displaying objects from Master3.16.187. Restoring a picture to its original size
4. IBM Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.1. Shortcut keys for accessibility4.2. Keyboard Navigation4.3. Working with spreadsheets
4.3.1. Assigning Formats by Formula4.3.2. Applying Cell Formatting Conditions4.3.3. Undoing direct formatting in Spreadsheet4.3.4. Copying to Multiple Sheets4.3.5. Selecting Multiple Cells4.3.6. Merging and Unmerging Sheet Cells4.3.7. Decimal Format4.3.8. User-defined Number Formats4.3.9. Formatting Numbers as Text4.3.10. Inserting and Editing Comments4.3.11. Renaming Sheets4.3.12. Changing Row Height or Column Width4.3.13. Changing Table Views4.3.14. Using Round Numbers4.3.15. Only Copy Visible Cells4.3.16. Copying formatting with duplicate formatting in Spreadsheets4.3.17. Inserting line breaks in cells4.3.18. Rotating text in Spreadsheets4.3.19. Writing Multi-line Text4.3.20. Text Superscript / Subscript
4.4. Entering Values4.4.1. Entering Formulas Using the Formula Bar4.4.2. Copying Formulas4.4.3. Adding a calculation4.4.4. Calculating With Dates and Times4.4.5. Calculating Time Differences4.4.6. Entering Fractions
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
11 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
4.4.7. Entering a Number with Leading Zeros4.4.8. Applying Multiple Sheets
4.5. Hiding Data Ranges4.5.1. Filter and Sorting4.5.2. Automatically Calculating Sequence4.5.3. Filtering Cell Ranges4.5.4. Applying Sort Lists4.5.5. Applying Instant Filter4.5.6. Applying Special Filters
4.6. Naming Cells4.6.1. Recognizing Names as Addressing4.6.2. Using Drag and Drop to Create Cells References4.6.3. Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative4.6.4. Referencing URLs4.6.5. Entering Matrix Formulas
4.7. Summarizing large amounts of data using DataPilot4.7.1. Working with a DataPilot table
4.7.1.1. Selecting Data Source and placing the result4.7.1.2. Understanding DataPilot areas4.7.1.3. Defining the fields in a DataPilot table4.7.1.4. Selecting the function and the display value4.7.1.5. Using the field option4.7.1.6. Updating changes from DataPilot panel to table4.7.1.7. Changing the order of fields by moving fields within one area4.7.1.8. Removing fields4.7.1.9. Hiding the selected items
4.8. Using the DataPilot filter4.8.1. Displaying a subset of data by using page fields4.8.2. Displaying or hiding items in a row or column4.8.3. Using the data source filter4.8.4. Displaying the top items in a field
4.9. Manipulating DataPilot tables4.9.1. Rearranging fields4.9.2. Displaying source data4.9.3. Resizing the column widths automatically4.9.4. Setting DataPilot table properties4.9.5. Sorting DataPilot tables4.9.6. Retrieving and refreshing the data4.9.7. Using Variables in Equations
4.9.7.1. Applying Multiple Operations4.9.7.2. Validity of Cell Contents4.9.7.3. Using Scenarios
4.10. Printing spreadsheets4.10.1. Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet4.10.2. Printing Sheet Details4.10.3. Defining Number of Pages for Printing a Speadsheet4.10.4. Printing Sheets in Landscape Format4.10.5. Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page4.10.6. Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics in spreadsheets
4.11. Opening and Saving Text CSV Files4.11.1. Importing and Exporting CSV Text Files with Formulas
4.11.1.1. Saving Spreadsheets in other formats4.11.2. Saving documents in other formats
4.12. Common formatting methods in spreadsheets4.12.1. Formatting a spreadsheet4.12.2. Freezing rows or columns as Headers4.12.3. Highlighting Negative Numbers4.12.4. Cells in Currency Format4.12.5. Adjusting Instant Correction Formatting4.12.6. Moving rows and columns by dragging
4.13. Applying Automatic Formatting to a Selected Cell Range4.13.1. Consolidating Data
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
12 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
4.13.2. Pasting Contents in Special Formats4.13.3. Rotating Tables (Transposing)4.13.4. User-Defined Functions4.13.5. 19xx/20xx Years4.13.6. Applying line styles using the Toolbar
4.14. References4.14.1. Referencing Cells from One Sheet to Another4.14.2. Navigating Through Sheet Tabs
4.15. Using formulas in calculations4.15.1. Calculating With Formulas
4.16. Protecting content in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.16.1. Protecting Cells from Changes4.16.2. Unprotecting Cells
4.17. Using function types and operators in spreadsheets4.17.1. Function Wizard4.17.2. Functions by Category4.17.3. Date and Time Functions4.17.4. Financial Functions Part One4.17.5. Financial Functions Part Two4.17.6. Financial Functions Part Three4.17.7. Information Functions4.17.8. Logical Functions4.17.9. Mathematical Functions4.17.10. Array Functions4.17.11. Statistics Functions4.17.12. Statistical Functions Part One4.17.13. Statistical Functions Part Two4.17.14. Statistical Functions Part Three4.17.15. Statistical Functions Part Four4.17.16. Statistical Functions Part Five4.17.17. Spreadsheet Functions4.17.18. Text Functions4.17.19. Add-in Functions4.17.20. Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One4.17.21. Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part Two4.17.22. Operators in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets
4.18. Menus and toolbars in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.18.1. Menus of Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets
4.18.1.1. File menu in Spreadsheets4.18.1.2. Edit menu in spreadsheets4.18.1.3. View menu in Spreadsheets4.18.1.4. Create menu in spreadsheets4.18.1.5. Layout menu list in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.18.1.6. Tools menu list in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.18.1.7. Window menu in Spreadsheets4.18.1.8. Data menu in spreadsheets
4.18.2. Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.18.2.1. Context Sensitive bar in Spreadsheets
4.18.2.1.1. Text object bar in Spreadsheets4.18.2.1.2. Graphic Object bar in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.18.2.1.3. OLE Object bar in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.18.2.1.4. Drawing Object bar in Spreadsheets4.18.2.1.5. Form Object bar in Spreadsheets4.18.2.1.6. Print Preview bar in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets
4.18.2.2. Opening the drawing bar in Spreadsheets4.18.2.3. Editing bar in spreadsheets4.18.2.4. File bar in Spreadsheets4.18.2.5. Forms bar in spreadsheets
4.19. Spreadsheets: Reference4.19.1. Instructions for Using Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.2. Setting the row height in spreadsheets4.19.3. Column width
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
13 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
4.19.4. Aligning cell contents in spreadsheets4.19.5. Hide Columns4.19.6. Show Column4.19.7. Sort Ascending4.19.8. Sort Descending4.19.9. Applying and removing Instant Filter4.19.10. Remove Filter/Sorting4.19.11. Setting filter options4.19.12. Standard Filter4.19.13. Comparison Operators in spreadsheets4.19.14. Functions Types and Operators4.19.15. Function Toolbar Set4.19.16. Formatting Bar4.19.17. Formula Input Line4.19.18. Sorting Database Ranges4.19.19. Welcome to IBM Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.20. Spreadsheet Toolbar Set 24.19.21. Text Import for CSV data4.19.22. Fill4.19.23. Down4.19.24. Filling cell contents from left to right4.19.25. Up4.19.26. Filling cell contents from right to left4.19.27. Fill Sheet4.19.28. Fill Series4.19.29. Deleting content from cells or sheets4.19.30. Delete Cells4.19.31. Delete Sheet4.19.32. Move or Copy a Sheet4.19.33. Delete Break4.19.34. Deleting a row break4.19.35. Removing a column break4.19.36. Sheet options4.19.37. Selecting Sheets4.19.38. Column & Row Headers4.19.39. Value Highlighting4.19.40. Showing or hiding Formula Input Line4.19.41. Page Breaks Preview4.19.42. Inserting breaks in spreadsheets4.19.43. Creating a row break4.19.44. Inserting a column break4.19.45. Insert Cells4.19.46. Creating rows or columns4.19.47. Creating columns4.19.48. Create Sheets4.19.49. Name4.19.50. Define Names4.19.51. Insert Name4.19.52. Creating Names4.19.53. Define Label Range4.19.54. Function List4.19.55. Cell Protection4.19.56. Hide4.19.57. Show4.19.58. Optimal Column Width4.19.59. Sheet layout4.19.60. Show Sheet4.19.61. Merging or Splitting Cells4.19.62. Merge4.19.63. Splitting cells in spreadsheets4.19.64. Setting up page formatting in spreadsheets4.19.65. Setting print options in spreadsheets
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
14 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
4.19.66. Print Ranges4.19.67. Define4.19.68. Removing print ranges4.19.69. Edit Print Ranges4.19.70. Add4.19.71. Style list in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.72. Applying cell style4.19.73. Instant Formatting4.19.74. Conditional Formatting4.19.75. Cell style4.19.76. Solve Equations4.19.77. Create Scenario4.19.78. Protect Document4.19.79. Protecting Sheet4.19.80. Protecting document4.19.81. Instant Calculate4.19.82. ReCalculate4.19.83. Instant Input4.19.84. Cell Contents4.19.85. Page Style4.19.86. Creating headers and footers in spreadsheets4.19.87. Formatting headers and footers in spreadsheets4.19.88. Row height and row hide and show4.19.89. Optimal Row Heights4.19.90. Column4.19.91. Split window4.19.92. Freeze4.19.93. Sort rows4.19.94. Sort Criteria4.19.95. Setting sorting options4.19.96. Data filters in spreadsheets4.19.97. Applying Instant Filter through menu and toolbar entries4.19.98. More4.19.99. Special Filter4.19.100. Show All4.19.101. Hide Filter Controls4.19.102. Subtotals4.19.103. 1st, 2nd, 3rd Group4.19.104. Setting options for subtotals4.19.105. Multiple Operations4.19.106. Consolidation4.19.107. Consolidation by4.19.108. Outline4.19.109. Collapse4.19.110. Expand4.19.111. Grouping a cell range4.19.112. Removing rows or columns from a group4.19.113. Instant Outline4.19.114. Removing outlines4.19.115. Filter4.19.116. Setting options for filters4.19.117. Data4.19.118. Validity4.19.119. Criteria4.19.120. Input Help4.19.121. Error Alert4.19.122. Align Vertically4.19.123. Shifting cell content to another cell4.19.124. Number format: Currency4.19.125. Number format: Percent4.19.126. Number format: Standard4.19.127. Number Format: Add Decimal Place
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
15 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
4.19.128. Number Format: Delete Decimal Place4.19.129. Name Box4.19.130. Sum4.19.131. Function4.19.132. Input line4.19.133. Clearing the input line in spreadsheets4.19.134. Accept4.19.135. Position in spreadsheet4.19.136. Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning4.19.137. Zoom in function in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.138. Zoom out function in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.139. Working with advanced calculations4.19.140. Advanced Calculations4.19.141. Automatically filling a sequence of cells4.19.142. Bidirectional support4.19.143. Grouping Ranges and Calculating Subtotals4.19.144. Data Ranges4.19.145. Filters and sort lists4.19.146. Formatting elements in spreadsheets4.19.147. Formulas and Calculation4.19.148. Some functions of Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.149. Specifying print options for a spreadsheet4.19.150. Protection4.19.151. Scenario4.19.152. Viewing, Selecting, Copying4.19.153. To access this function...4.19.154. Edit menu list in spreadsheets4.19.155. Part of view menu list in spreadsheets4.19.156. Items of Create menu in spreadsheets4.19.157. Entries for splitting or freezing the window in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.158. Data Menu4.19.159. Page Preview4.19.160. Using the navigator toolbar in spreadsheets4.19.161. Link to External Data4.19.162. Working with text4.19.163. Detective4.19.164. Trace Precedents4.19.165. Remove Precedents4.19.166. Trace Dependents4.19.167. Remove Dependents4.19.168. Remove All Traces4.19.169. Trace Error4.19.170. Fill Mode4.19.171. Mark Invalid Data4.19.172. Refresh Traces4.19.173. Auto Refresh4.19.174. Expand (DataPilot)4.19.175. Refresh4.19.176. Delete4.19.177. Grouping items in DataPilot tables4.19.178. Create Sheet4.19.179. Graphic4.19.180. Date function in Spreadsheets4.19.181. DATEVALUE4.19.182. DAY4.19.183. DAYS4.19.184. DAYS3604.19.185. EASTERSUNDAY4.19.186. EDATE4.19.187. EOMONTH4.19.188. HOUR4.19.189. MINUTE
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
16 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
4.19.190. MONTH4.19.191. NETWORKDAYS4.19.192. NOW4.19.193. SECOND4.19.194. TIME function in Spreadsheets4.19.195. TIMEVALUE4.19.196. TODAY4.19.197. WEEKDAY4.19.198. WEEKNUM4.19.199. WEEKNUMADD4.19.200. WORKDAY4.19.201. YEAR4.19.202. YEARFRAC4.19.203. Solver4.19.204. Setting options for the solver engine4.19.205. Text to Columns4.19.206. Adding objects to a spreadsheet4.19.207. Create Cells4.19.208. Handling of Empty Cells4.19.209. Naming cell ranges4.19.210. User Defined Borders in Cells4.19.211. Command reference in spreadsheets4.19.212. Grouping DataPilot table entries4.19.213. Moving Cells by Drag-and-Drop4.19.214. Referencing cells in spreadsheets4.19.215. Applying standard filter4.19.216. Editing and Formatting Text4.19.217. Rename Sheet4.19.218. Options4.19.219. Organizing data using a DataPilot table4.19.220. Creating a DataPilot table4.19.221. New Spreadsheet4.19.222. Displaying Formulas or Values4.19.223. Setting default printer options for Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.224. Protecting documents4.19.225. Spreadsheet Features4.19.226. Database Functions4.19.227. Original Size4.19.228. To edit a chart4.19.229. Importing data4.19.230. Error Codes in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets4.19.231. Add-in for Programming in Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets
5. Charts in IBM Lotus Symphony5.1. Create Charts5.2. Keyboard Navigation for Charts5.3. Inserting Charts5.4. New formatting options5.5. Charts and Diagrams: Reference
5.5.1. Editing chart axes5.5.2. Adding texture to chart bars5.5.3. Editing the legend5.5.4. Editing Chart Titles5.5.5. Toolbars of charts5.5.6. Chart Editing bar5.5.7. Data Table5.5.8. Titles5.5.9. Create Legend5.5.10. Data Labels5.5.11. Displaying axes in charts5.5.12. Displaying statistics for 2D objects5.5.13. Setting options for charts5.5.14. Grids
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
17 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
5.5.15. Setting object properties for charts5.5.16. Editing properties of titles in charts5.5.17. Title properties5.5.18. Aligning chart titles5.5.19. Setting alignment for chart labels5.5.20. Legend5.5.21. Axis5.5.22. Setting axes properties in charts5.5.23. Y Axis5.5.24. Scaling5.5.25. Selecting grid to define properties in charts5.5.26. Defining grid properties in charts5.5.27. Chart Wall5.5.28. Chart Floor5.5.29. Chart Area5.5.30. Defining a chart type5.5.31. Chart Style5.5.32. Defining axis rotation for a 3D chart5.5.33. Arrangement5.5.34. Data in Rows5.5.35. Data in Columns5.5.36. Automatic Layout5.5.37. Chart Data5.5.38. Trend Lines5.5.39. Data Point5.5.40. Data Series5.5.41. Font effects5.5.42. Choosing a Chart Type5.5.43. Smooth Line Properties5.5.44. Setting 3D view properties5.5.45. Chart Type Area5.5.46. Chart Type Column and Bar5.5.47. Chart Type Column and Line5.5.48. Chart Type Line5.5.49. Chart Type Net5.5.50. Chart Type Pie5.5.51. Chart Type Stock5.5.52. Chart Type XY (Scatter)5.5.53. Chart - Chart Elements5.5.54. Selecting a chart type when creating a chart5.5.55. Chart - Data Range5.5.56. Chart - Data Series5.5.57. Scale Text5.5.58. Current Chart Type5.5.59. Using menus, toolbars and shortcut keys in charts5.5.60. Display of the status bar5.5.61. Positioning
6. Macros and Programming6.1. Basics6.2. Syntax6.3. IBM Lotus Symphony Basic IDE6.4. IDE Overview6.5. The Basic Editor6.6. Watch Window6.7. Macro Toolbar6.8. Macro6.9. Using Procedures and Functions6.10. Libraries, Modules and Dialogs6.11. Screen I/O Functions6.12. File I/O Functions6.13. Date and time functions in Basic6.14. Logical Operators
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
18 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
6.15. Mathematical Operators6.16. Fields in Macros6.17. Displaying formatting symbols in Macros6.18. Comparison Operators in Macros6.19. Strings6.20. Other Commands
6.20.1. Abs Function [Runtime]6.20.2. AND Operator [Runtime]6.20.3. Array Function [Runtime]6.20.4. Asc Function [Runtime]6.20.5. Atn Function [Runtime]6.20.6. Beep Statement [Runtime]6.20.7. Blue Function [Runtime]6.20.8. CBool Function [Runtime]6.20.9. CByte Function [Runtime]6.20.10. CDateFromIso Function [Runtime]6.20.11. CDateToIso Function [Runtime]6.20.12. CDate Function [Runtime]6.20.13. CDbl Function [Runtime]6.20.14. CInt Function [Runtime]6.20.15. CLng Function [Runtime]6.20.16. CSng Function[Runtime]6.20.17. CStr Function [Runtime]6.20.18. Call Statement [Runtime]6.20.19. ChDir Statement [Runtime]6.20.20. ChDrive Statement [Runtime]6.20.21. Choose Function [Runtime]6.20.22. Chr Function [Runtime]6.20.23. Close Statement [Runtime]6.20.24. Comparison Operators [Runtime]6.20.25. Const Statement [Runtime]6.20.26. ConvertFromURL Function [Runtime]6.20.27. ConvertToURL Function [Runtime]6.20.28. Cos Function [Runtime]6.20.29. CreateUnoDialog Function [Runtime]6.20.30. CreateUnoListener Function [Runtime]6.20.31. CreateUnoService Function [Runtime]6.20.32. CreateUnoStruct Function [Runtime]6.20.33. CurDir Function [Runtime]6.20.34. DateSerial Function [Runtime]6.20.35. DateValue Function [Runtime]6.20.36. Date Statement [Runtime]6.20.37. Day Function [Runtime]6.20.38. DefBool Statement [Runtime]6.20.39. DefDate Statement [Runtime]6.20.40. DefDbl Statement [Runtime]6.20.41. DefInt Statement [Runtime]6.20.42. DefLng Statement [Runtime]6.20.43. DefObj Statement [Runtime]6.20.44. DefVar Statement [Runtime]6.20.45. Declare Statement [Runtime]6.20.46. DimArray Function [Runtime]6.20.47. Dim Statement [Runtime]6.20.48. Dir Function [Runtime]6.20.49. Do...Loop Statement [Runtime]6.20.50. End Statement [Runtime]6.20.51. Environ Function [Runtime]6.20.52. Eof Function [Runtime]6.20.53. EqualUnoObjects Function [Runtime]6.20.54. Eqv Operator [Runtime]6.20.55. Erl Function [Runtime]6.20.56. Err Function [Runtime]
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
19 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
6.20.57. Error Function [Runtime]6.20.58. Ruler in Macros6.20.59. Exit Statement [Runtime]6.20.60. Exp Function [Runtime]6.20.61. FileAttr Function [Runtime]6.20.62. FileCopy Statement [Runtime]6.20.63. FileDateTime Function [Runtime]6.20.64. FileExists Function [Runtime]6.20.65. FileLen Function [Runtime]6.20.66. FindObject Function [Runtime]6.20.67. FindPropertyObject Function [Runtime]6.20.68. Fix Function [Runtime]6.20.69. For...Next Statement [Runtime]6.20.70. Format Function [Runtime]6.20.71. FreeFile Function[Runtime]6.20.72. FreeLibrary Function [Runtime]6.20.73. Function Statement [Runtime]6.20.74. Further Statements6.20.75. Generating Random Numbers6.20.76. GetAttr Function [Runtime]6.20.77. GetProcessServiceManager Function [Runtime]6.20.78. GetSolarVersion Function [Runtime]6.20.79. GetSystemTicks Function [Runtime]6.20.80. Get Statement [Runtime]6.20.81. GlobalScope [Runtime]6.20.82. GoSub...Return Statement [Runtime]6.20.83. GoTo Statement [Runtime]6.20.84. Green Function [Runtime]6.20.85. HasUnoInterfaces Function [Runtime]6.20.86. Hex Function [Runtime]6.20.87. Hour Function [Runtime]6.20.88. IIf Statement [Runtime]6.20.89. If...Then...Else Statement [Runtime]6.20.90. Imp Operator [Runtime]6.20.91. InStr Function [Runtime]6.20.92. InputBox Function [Runtime]6.20.93. Input# Statement [Runtime]6.20.94. Int Function [Runtime]6.20.95. IsArray Function [Runtime]6.20.96. IsDate Function [Runtime]6.20.97. IsEmpty Function [Runtime]6.20.98. IsMissing function [Runtime]6.20.99. IsNull Function [Runtime]6.20.100. IsNumeric Function [Runtime]6.20.101. IsObject Function [Runtime]6.20.102. IsUnoStruct Function [Runtime]6.20.103. Join Function [Runtime]6.20.104. Kill Statement [Runtime]6.20.105. LBound Function [Runtime]6.20.106. LCase Function [Runtime]6.20.107. LSet Statement [Runtime]6.20.108. LTrim Function [Runtime]6.20.109. Left Function [Runtime]6.20.110. Len Function [Runtime]6.20.111. Let Statement [Runtime]6.20.112. Line Input # Statement [Runtime]6.20.113. Loc Function [Runtime]6.20.114. Lof Function [Runtime]6.20.115. Log Function [Runtime]6.20.116. Mid Function, Mid Statement [Runtime]6.20.117. Minute Function [Runtime]6.20.118. MkDir Statement [Runtime]
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
20 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
6.20.119. Mod Operator [Runtime]6.20.120. Month Function [Runtime]6.20.121. MsgBox Function [Runtime]6.20.122. MsgBox Statement [Runtime]6.20.123. Name Statement [Runtime]6.20.124. Not-Operator [Runtime]6.20.125. Now Function [Runtime]6.20.126. Numeric Functions6.20.127. Oct Function [Runtime]6.20.128. On Error GoTo ... Resume Statement [Runtime]6.20.129. On...GoSub Statement; On...GoTo Statement [Runtime]6.20.130. Open Statement[Runtime]6.20.131. Option Base Statement [Runtime]6.20.132. Option Explicit Statement [Runtime]6.20.133. Optional (in Function Statement) [Runtime]6.20.134. Or Operator [Runtime]6.20.135. Print Statement [Runtime]6.20.136. Public Statement [Runtime]6.20.137. Put Statement [Runtime]6.20.138. QBColor Function [Runtime]6.20.139. RGB Function [Runtime]6.20.140. RSet Statement [Runtime]6.20.141. RTrim Function [Runtime]6.20.142. Randomize Statement [Runtime]6.20.143. ReDim Statement [Runtime]6.20.144. Red Function [Runtime]6.20.145. Rem Statement [Runtime]6.20.146. Reset Statement [Runtime]6.20.147. Right Function [Runtime]6.20.148. RmDir Statement [Runtime]6.20.149. Rnd Function [Runtime]6.20.150. Second Function [Runtime]6.20.151. Seek Function [Runtime]6.20.152. Seek Statement [Runtime]6.20.153. Select...Case Statement [Runtime]6.20.154. SetAttr Statement [Runtime]6.20.155. Set Statement[Runtime]6.20.156. Sgn Function [Runtime]6.20.157. Shell Function [Runtime]6.20.158. Sin Function [Runtime]6.20.159. Space Function [Runtime]6.20.160. Split Function [Runtime]6.20.161. Sqr Function [Runtime]6.20.162. Square Root Calculation6.20.163. Static Statement [Runtime]6.20.164. Stop Statement [Runtime]6.20.165. StrComp Function [Runtime]6.20.166. Str Function [Runtime]6.20.167. String Function [Runtime]6.20.168. Sub Statement [Runtime]6.20.169. Switch Function [Runtime]6.20.170. Tan Function [Runtime]6.20.171. TimeSerial Function [Runtime]6.20.172. TimeValue Function [Runtime]6.20.173. Time Statement [Runtime]6.20.174. Timer Function [Runtime]6.20.175. Trigonometric Functions6.20.176. Trim Function [Runtime]6.20.177. TwipsPerPixelX Function [Runtime]6.20.178. TwipsPerPixelY Function [Runtime]6.20.179. TypeName Function; VarType Function[Runtime]6.20.180. UBound Function [Runtime]
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
21 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
6.20.181. UCase Function [Runtime]6.20.182. Val Function [Runtime]6.20.183. Wait Statement [Runtime]6.20.184. WeekDay Function [Runtime]6.20.185. While...Wend Statement[Runtime]6.20.186. With Statement [Runtime]6.20.187. Write Statement [Runtime]6.20.188. Xor-Operator [Runtime]6.20.189. Year Function [Runtime]6.20.190. - Operator [Runtime]6.20.191. * Operator [Runtime]6.20.192. + Operator [Runtime]6.20.193. / Operator [Runtime]6.20.194. ̂Operator [Runtime]
6.21. Guides to Macros6.21.1. Changing the Properties of Controls in the Dialog Editor6.21.2. Creating Controls in the Dialog Editor6.21.3. Programming Examples for Controls in the Dialog Editor6.21.4. Opening a Dialog With Program Code6.21.5. Creating a Basic Dialog6.21.6. Organizing Libraries and Modules6.21.7. Using Variables6.21.8. Using the Object Catalog6.21.9. Debugging a Basic Program
6.22. Lotus Symphony Basic Glossary6.23. VBA Interoperability
6.23.1. Editing and Running VBA Macro6.23.2. VBA APIs and Events6.23.3. Examples
6.24. Macros and Programming: Reference6.24.1. Recording a Macro6.24.2. Integrated Development Environment (IDE)6.24.3. Call Stack Window (Calls)6.24.4. Manage Breakpoints6.24.5. Control and Dialog Properties6.24.6. General in Macros6.24.7. Events in Macros6.24.8. Run-Time Functions6.24.9. Display Functions6.24.10. Functions for Screen Input6.24.11. Color Functions6.24.12. Converting Date Values6.24.13. Converting Time Values6.24.14. System Date and Time6.24.15. Exponential and Logarithmic Functions6.24.16. Integers6.24.17. Absolute Values6.24.18. Expression Signs6.24.19. Converting Numbers6.24.20. Condition Statements6.24.21. Loops6.24.22. Jumps6.24.23. Global Statement [Runtime]6.24.24. ASCII/ANSI Conversion in Strings6.24.25. Repeating Contents6.24.26. Editing String Contents6.24.27. Editing String Length6.24.28. GetGuiType Function [Runtime]6.24.29. ThisComponent [Runtime]6.24.30. CreateUnoValue Function [Runtime]6.24.31. Keyboard Shortcuts in the Basic IDE6.24.32. Change Library Password
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
22 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
6.24.33. Library6.24.34. Compile6.24.35. Run6.24.36. Stop6.24.37. Single Step6.24.38. Procedure Step6.24.39. Breakpoint6.24.40. Enable Watch6.24.41. Object Catalog6.24.42. Description in Macros6.24.43. Macros6.24.44. Modules6.24.45. Find Parentheses6.24.46. Step Out6.24.47. Managing Breakpoints6.24.48. Insert Controls6.24.49. Alphabetic List of Functions, Statements and Operators6.24.50. Conversion of measurement units6.24.51. Setting preferences in Macros6.24.52. Save Source As6.24.53. Common product and component information for content references6.24.54. Managing Files6.24.55. DateAdd Function [Runtime]6.24.56. DateDiff Function [Runtime]6.24.57. DatePart Function [Runtime]6.24.58. CCur Function [Runtime]6.24.59. CDec Function [Runtime]6.24.60. CVar Function [Runtime]6.24.61. CVErr Function [Runtime]6.24.62. DefCur Statement [Runtime]6.24.63. DefErr Statement [Runtime]6.24.64. DefSng Statement [Runtime]6.24.65. DefStr Statement [Runtime]6.24.66. IsError Function [Runtime]6.24.67. Erase Function [Runtime]6.24.68. CreateObject Function [Runtime]6.24.69. GetDefaultContext Function [Runtime]6.24.70. Command reference6.24.71. Run-time functions, statements and operators6.24.72. Translation of Controls in the Dialog Editor6.24.73. Opening and Closing Files6.24.74. File Input/Output Functions6.24.75. Append libraries in Basic6.24.76. Insert Source Text6.24.77. Programming with Lotus Symphony Basic6.24.78. Lotus Symphony Basic Macros6.24.79. Running Macros
7. IBM Lotus Symphony preferences7.1. General preferences settings
7.1.1. General preferences7.1.1.1. General information about Load and Save7.1.1.2. Setting general view preferences7.1.1.3. Setting printer options for IBM Lotus Symphony7.1.1.4. Memory7.1.1.5. Color Scheme7.1.1.6. Accessibility7.1.1.7. Load and Save7.1.1.8. Updates
7.1.2. Chart options7.1.3. VBA Properties7.1.4. Microsoft Office7.1.5. Caption preferences
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
23 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
7.1.6. Setting the preferences for changes in Lotus Symphony Documents7.1.7. Default fonts7.1.8. Formatting Aids7.1.9. Setting view preferences for Lotus Symphony Documents
7.2. Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets7.2.1. Calculations7.2.2. Highlighting changes in spreadsheets7.2.3. Sort Lists7.2.4. Setting view preferences for Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets
7.3. Defining global preferences for Lotus Symphony Presentations7.3.1. Setting view preferences for Lotus Symphony Presentations
7.4. Enabling performance optimization7.5. Colors7.6. Fonts command to override default substitutions7.7. Language Settings
7.7.1. Asian layout settings7.7.2. Search in Japanese7.7.3. Complex Text Layout7.7.4. Languages7.7.5. Spell Check properties
7.8. Provisioning updates to a plug-in7.8.1. Setting widget preferences7.8.2. Updating widgets7.8.3. Installing new widgets7.8.4. Removing widgets7.8.5. Exporting Widgets7.8.6. Installing widgets from category7.8.7. Configuring a widget as a component
7.9. Using live text7.9.1. Acting on live text7.9.2. Controlling the display of live text for all documents in a session7.9.3. Controlling the display of live text in the current document7.9.4. Configuring live text content types
7.10. Security7.11. Regional settings7.12. Warning Messages7.13. Preferences: Reference
7.13.1. Captions7.13.2. Compatibility7.13.3. Using the Mail Merge function7.13.4. Setting default printer options for Lotus Symphony Documents7.13.5. Search7.13.6. Searching in Japanese7.13.7. Chart Colors7.13.8. Editing colors7.13.9. Asian Layout7.13.10. Macro Security7.13.11. Setting default printer options for Lotus Symphony Presentations7.13.12. Setting default options for Lotus Symphony Presentations7.13.13. General settings for spreadsheets7.13.14. Copy List
8. Common tasks8.1. Accessibility features for IBM Lotus Symphony
8.1.1. Shortcuts (Lotus Symphony Accessibility)8.1.2. General Shortcut Keys in Lotus Symphony8.1.3. Shortcut Keys
8.2. How to simplify your work using samples and templates8.3. Using Microsoft Office and Lotus Symphony
8.3.1. Comparing Microsoft Office and Lotus Symphony Terms8.3.2. About Converting Microsoft Office Documents8.3.3. Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types8.3.4. Converting Microsoft Office 2007 files
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
24 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.4. Versions and Build Numbers8.5. Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects
8.5.1. Navigator for Document Overview8.5.2. Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows8.5.3. Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode8.5.4. Using Toolbars
8.6. Dragging and Dropping Within a Lotus Symphony Document8.6.1. Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View
8.7. Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents8.7.1. Copying Graphics Between Documents8.7.2. Copying graphics from the clip art8.7.3. Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents
8.8. Opening Documents8.8.1. Saving Documents8.8.2. Saving Documents Automatically
8.9. Inserting Hyperlinks8.9.1. Relative and Absolute Links8.9.2. Editing Hyperlinks
8.10. Comparing Versions of a Document8.10.1. Merging Versions8.10.2. Recording Changes8.10.3. Tracking changes8.10.4. Accepting or rejecting changes8.10.5. Version Management
8.11. Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards8.12. Inserting data from spreadsheets
8.12.1. Inserting text into spreadsheets or presentations8.13. Turning off automatic URL recognition8.14. List of Regular Expressions8.15. Changing the Color of Text8.16. Changing the Title of a Document8.17. Creating Round Corners8.18. Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics in Lotus Symphony8.19. Defining line styles8.20. Drawing a graphic8.21. Adding lines8.22. Linking graphics from the clip art8.23. Inserting Protected Spaces, Hyphens and Conditional Separators8.24. Inserting special characters8.25. Setting tabs8.26. Protecting content in IBM Lotus Symphony8.27. Protecting Records8.28. Selecting the maximum area to be printed on a page8.29. Selecting Measurement Units8.30. Selecting a language8.31. Properties panel
8.31.1. Displaying the Properties panel8.31.2. Closing the Properties panel8.31.3. Changing the position of the Properties panel8.31.4. Setting text properties8.31.5. Setting line properties8.31.6. Setting position and size properties8.31.7. Setting a page layout8.31.8. Setting paragraph properties8.31.9. Setting area properties8.31.10. Wrapping text around a picture8.31.11. Setting alignment properties8.31.12. Setting page properties8.31.13. Setting cell appearance properties8.31.14. Setting a number format8.31.15. Setting table design styles8.31.16. Setting graphic properties
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
25 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.32. Inserting links to Lotus Notes documents8.33. Provisioning updates to a client plug-in8.34. Common Tasks: Reference
8.34.1. Status Bar in Lotus Symphony Basic Documents8.34.2. Glossaries8.34.3. Creating new documents8.34.4. Auto recognizer8.34.5. Opening Microsoft Word or Excel documents that are protected by password8.34.6. Creating a new document8.34.7. Open8.34.8. Save8.34.9. Entering the Print Preview page8.34.10. Undo8.34.11. Redo8.34.12. Repeat8.34.13. Cut8.34.14. Copy8.34.15. Paste8.34.16. Select All8.34.17. Setting find and replace options8.34.18. Similarity Search8.34.19. Edit Links8.34.20. Reviewing documents8.34.21. Record8.34.22. Protect Records8.34.23. Show Changes8.34.24. Accept or Reject window8.34.25. List8.34.26. Filtering the list of changes8.34.27. Merge Document8.34.28. Adjusting the page magnification8.34.29. Comments8.34.30. Special Characters8.34.31. Inserting Pictures8.34.32. Graphic from File8.34.33. Default Formatting8.34.34. Text Properties8.34.35. Number Format Codes8.34.36. Setting position properties for text8.34.37. Setting double-line writing for Asian languages8.34.38. Asian Typography8.34.39. Paragraph Properties8.34.40. Cropping graphics using menu entry8.34.41. Setting the layout and margins8.34.42. Setting header properties8.34.43. Setting footer properties8.34.44. Changing Case8.34.45. Aligning (Objects)8.34.46. Align Left8.34.47. Center Horizontal8.34.48. Align Right8.34.49. Align Top8.34.50. Align Vertical Center8.34.51. Align Bottom8.34.52. Align (Text Objects)8.34.53. Aligning paragraphs to left margin8.34.54. Aligning paragraphs to right margin8.34.55. Centering text in all editors8.34.56. Justified8.34.57. Font command for advanced text properties8.34.58. Font Size8.34.59. Font Style
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
26 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.34.60. Bold8.34.61. Italic8.34.62. Underline8.34.63. Strikethrough8.34.64. Shadows8.34.65. Superscript8.34.66. Subscript8.34.67. Line Spacing8.34.68. Single Line Spacing8.34.69. 1.5 lines8.34.70. Double8.34.71. Create Style8.34.72. Add Instant Formatting8.34.73. Line Styles8.34.74. Arrow Styles8.34.75. Setting the position and size for selected objects8.34.76. Rotation8.34.77. Slant and Corner Radius8.34.78. Flip8.34.79. Flip Vertically8.34.80. Flip Horizontally8.34.81. Arranging Objects8.34.82. Bring to Front8.34.83. Bring Forward8.34.84. Send Backward8.34.85. Send to Back8.34.86. To Background8.34.87. Anchoring8.34.88. To Page8.34.89. To Paragraph8.34.90. To Character8.34.91. To Cell8.34.92. To Frame8.34.93. As Character8.34.94. Edit Points8.34.95. Group options8.34.96. Grouping objects8.34.97. Ungrouping objects8.34.98. Enter Group8.34.99. Exit Group8.34.100. Distribution8.34.101. Text Object Properties8.34.102. Checking spelling in all editors8.34.103. Writing aids8.34.104. Setting up instant correction formatting8.34.105. Setting instant correction options for all editors8.34.106. Changing which entries are corrected (in all editors)8.34.107. Specifying exceptions for instant corrections in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.108. Specifying replacement characters for quotation marks in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.109. Instant Corrections context menu8.34.110. Adding numbered or bulleted lists8.34.111. Applying styles for numbering8.34.112. Applying different styles to a hierarchical list8.34.113. Spell Check function8.34.114. Document List8.34.115. Alternative Text8.34.116. Drawing Objects8.34.117. Adding Files to the Clip Art8.34.118. Paragraph8.34.119. Graphic Properties8.34.120. Print File Directly8.34.121. Opening the Drawing bar
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
27 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.34.122. Display Grid8.34.123. Snap to Grid8.34.124. Guides When Moving8.34.125. Navigator8.34.126. Style List window8.34.127. Apply Style8.34.128. Font Name command in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.129. Setting the font size for text8.34.130. Text running from left to right8.34.131. Decrease Indent8.34.132. Indent8.34.133. Decrease Spacing8.34.134. Increase Spacing8.34.135. Border Color8.34.136. Change Anchor8.34.137. Rotate8.34.138. Aligning objects8.34.139. Demote One Level8.34.140. Promote One Level8.34.141. Move Up8.34.142. Move Down8.34.143. Bullets On/Off8.34.144. Document Information8.34.145. Insert Hyperlink8.34.146. Creating and editing hyperlinks8.34.147. Linking to targets in documents8.34.148. Previous Page8.34.149. Next Page8.34.150. First Page8.34.151. Last Page8.34.152. Selection8.34.153. Instant Spellcheck On/Off8.34.154. Current Page Style8.34.155. Zoom8.34.156. Document Modification8.34.157. Displaying current time8.34.158. Inserting the current date8.34.159. Time box8.34.160. Size8.34.161. Form Navigator8.34.162. The Lotus Symphony Help Window8.34.163. Index - Keyword Search in the Help8.34.164. Find - The Full-Text Search8.34.165. Managing Bookmarks8.34.166. Could not find Help page.8.34.167. Zoom Switch8.34.168. Correcting TWo INitial CApitals8.34.169. Capitalizing the first letter of every sentence8.34.170. A replacement has been carried out8.34.171. Double quotation marks have been replaced8.34.172. Single quotes have been replaced8.34.173. Ignoring double spaces8.34.174. Automatic bold and underline8.34.175. Replacing 1/2 with ½8.34.176. Replacing dashes8.34.177. Replacing 1st with 1st8.34.178. Defining Borders for Objects in Lotus Symphony8.34.179. Setting a border style8.34.180. Defining Borders for Paragraphs8.34.181. Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells8.34.182. Copy and Paste8.34.183. Adding Graphics to the Clip Art
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
28 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.34.184. Create Graphic from File8.34.185. General Instructions for Lotus Symphony8.34.186. Instructions for using IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.187. Switching Object Bars With the Context Menu8.34.188. Merging and splitting table cells8.34.189. Working with the User Interface8.34.190. Setting grid preferences8.34.191. Saving Microsoft Word or Excel documents that are protected by password8.34.192. Renaming a theme or a graphic in the Clip Art8.34.193. Object Name8.34.194. Style8.34.195. Setting position properties for lists8.34.196. Setting formatting options for lists8.34.197. Tabs8.34.198. Frequently-Used Buttons8.34.199. Using measurement units in Lotus Symphony8.34.200. Context Menus8.34.201. Menu Commands8.34.202. XML File Formats8.34.203. Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import8.34.204. Export of text files8.34.205. Setting JPEG Options8.34.206. Text Import8.34.207. Warning Print Options8.34.208. ASCII Filter Options8.34.209. Edit menu list in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.210. View menu list in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.211. Create menu in Lotus Symphony8.34.212. Entries for splitting or freezing the window in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.213. Help Menu8.34.214. The entry for Standard Filter8.34.215. Showing and Hiding Docked Windows8.34.216. Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode8.34.217. General properties of the current theme8.34.218. Master Document8.34.219. New from Template8.34.220. Creating labels8.34.221. Specifying text and paper size for labels8.34.222. Format8.34.223. Setting options for labels and business cards8.34.224. Creating business cards8.34.225. Medium8.34.226. Changing the layout of business cards8.34.227. Private8.34.228. Business8.34.229. Select Path8.34.230. Filter Selection8.34.231. Close8.34.232. Save As8.34.233. Exporting a file in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.234. File Properties8.34.235. Entering a description for a document8.34.236. General information about the current file8.34.237. Custom Properties8.34.238. Statistics of the current file8.34.239. Opening the Template Organizer window8.34.240. Organizing and defining templates8.34.241. Saving Templates8.34.242. Editing a template8.34.243. Printing documents8.34.244. Exit8.34.245. Versions
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
29 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.34.246. Recent Files8.34.247. Pasting copied data8.34.248. Navigator for Master Documents8.34.249. Modify Links8.34.250. The entry for inserting an object8.34.251. Image Map Editor8.34.252. Entering a description for an image map8.34.253. Adding comments8.34.254. Compare Document8.34.255. Tools Bar8.34.256. Confirm Delete8.34.257. Showing or hiding toolbar8.34.258. Creating an object8.34.259. Insert OLE Object8.34.260. Select Sound8.34.261. Select Video8.34.262. Font command for Styles and charts8.34.263. Specifying the font effects8.34.264. Specifying the formatting of numbers in cells8.34.265. Specifying the hyperlink properties8.34.266. Indents and Spacing8.34.267. Adding borders8.34.268. Adding a background to a page8.34.269. Aligning paragraphs8.34.270. Object Description8.34.271. Opening the Line window to set properties for lines8.34.272. Formatting lines8.34.273. Setting the area options for drawing objects8.34.274. Setting the fill options for drawing objects8.34.275. Gradients8.34.276. Hatching8.34.277. Bitmap8.34.278. Shadow8.34.279. Setting the transparency options for objects8.34.280. Text8.34.281. Opening Position and Size window8.34.282. Callout8.34.283. To Foreground8.34.284. Adding text animation effects to drawing objects8.34.285. Row format8.34.286. Deleting rows in Lotus Symphony8.34.287. Column format8.34.288. Language8.34.289. Bullets8.34.290. Working with macros8.34.291. Record Macros8.34.292. Organize Macros8.34.293. Append libraries8.34.294. Change Icon8.34.295. Applying templates8.34.296. Creating a new template8.34.297. Digital Signatures8.34.298. Formatting Mark8.34.299. Clip Art8.34.300. Setting the grid display properties in Lotus Symphony Presentations8.34.301. Setting the display options for guide lines8.34.302. Media Player8.34.303. Video or Sound8.34.304. Export as PDF8.34.305. Security Warning8.34.306. Select Certificate8.34.307. Data Navigator
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
30 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.34.308. Add / Edit8.34.309. Add Condition8.34.310. Change Data Binding8.34.311. Form Namespaces8.34.312. Data (for XML Form Documents)8.34.313. Context Menu of a Control Field8.34.314. Special properties of a formatted field8.34.315. Control Properties8.34.316. Linking macros to the events of a form control8.34.317. Form Properties8.34.318. General settings for the current form8.34.319. Linking macros to form events8.34.320. Tab Order8.34.321. Automatic Control Focus8.34.322. Design Mode On/Off8.34.323. Opening Form Navigator from toolbar8.34.324. Table Element / List Box / Combo Box: Data8.34.325. Table Element: Field Selection8.34.326. List Box: Field Link8.34.327. Open in Design Mode8.34.328. Text running from top to bottom8.34.329. Highlighting8.34.330. Paragraph background8.34.331. Arrow Style8.34.332. Load URL8.34.333. Export Directly as PDF8.34.334. URL Name8.34.335. Internet URLs8.34.336. Mail & News8.34.337. Setting up a hyperlink to a new document8.34.338. Apply Filter8.34.339. Setting Tabs8.34.340. Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns8.34.341. Graphics Mode8.34.342. Red8.34.343. Green8.34.344. Blue8.34.345. Brightness8.34.346. Contrast8.34.347. Gamma8.34.348. Specifying the transparency for graphic objects8.34.349. Cropping graphics using toolbar icon8.34.350. Basic Shapes8.34.351. Block Arrows8.34.352. Callouts8.34.353. Flowchart8.34.354. Fontwork Gallery8.34.355. General settings for a form control8.34.356. Duplicate Formatting8.34.357. Stars and Banners8.34.358. Symbol Shapes8.34.359. Contents - The Main Help Topics8.34.360. 3D-Settings8.34.361. Exporting to PDF8.34.362. Correcting two capital letters at the beginning of a sentence8.34.363. Instant Corrections has performed a replacement8.34.364. URL recognition8.34.365. Fontwork8.34.366. Assistive Tools in Lotus Symphony8.34.367. Setting a customized border style8.34.368. Working with charts8.34.369. Languages Using Complex Text Layout
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
31 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
8.34.370. Configuring IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.371. About Digital Signatures8.34.372. Applying Digital Signatures8.34.373. Error Report Tool8.34.374. Using the Filter Navigator8.34.375. Searching for Attributes8.34.376. Enabling Specific Toolbars8.34.377. Working with Groups8.34.378. Common File Formatting8.34.379. Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images8.34.380. Inserting External Data8.34.381. Integrating new UNO components8.34.382. Copying formatting with Format Paintbrush8.34.383. Searching and replacing overview8.34.384. Setting up Printer, Fax and Fonts Under UNIX Based Platforms8.34.385. Starting the Lotus Symphony Software With Parameters8.34.386. Merging and splitting table cells in Lotus Symphony Documents and Presentations8.34.387. Help8.34.388. Programming Lotus Symphony8.34.389. Java Platform Support8.34.390. About XML Filters8.34.391. Certificate Path8.34.392. Change default template8.34.393. Details8.34.394. E-mail8.34.395. Edit Paths8.34.396. Edit module8.34.397. General information about View Certificate8.34.398. Lotus Symphony8.34.399. Mozilla/Netscape Plug-in8.34.400. Network Identity8.34.401. Security Level8.34.402. Trusted Sources8.34.403. View Certificate8.34.404. Welcome to IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.405. Glossary of Internet Terms8.34.406. General Glossary8.34.407. Merge table cells8.34.408. Split Cells8.34.409. Top8.34.410. Middle8.34.411. Aligning to bottom through context menu8.34.412. Outlining text8.34.413. Opening the Macros window in IBM Lotus Symphony8.34.414. Edit Custom Dictionary8.34.415. Printing in Black and White8.34.416. Sending Faxes and Configuring Lotus Symphony for Faxing8.34.417. Viewing File Properties8.34.418. Using Context Menus8.34.419. User Data8.34.420. Printer setup8.34.421. Setting options for an HTML page8.34.422. HTML compatibility8.34.423. Asian Phonetic Guide8.34.424. Saving documents with password8.34.425. Continuing Previous Numbering8.34.426. Save graphics8.34.427. Changing Default Templates8.34.428. Adding a Command Button to a Document8.34.429. About Import and Export Filters8.34.430. Mac shortcuts8.34.431. Clip Art context menu
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
32 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Symphony Documents
Create, edit, share wordprocessing documents.
Symphony Presentations
Make your own high impactpresentations.
Symphony Spreadsheets
Calculate, analyze, andmanage your data.
Preferences
Configure and customizeLotus Symphony to fit you.
Charts
Present data graphically in achart to view trends.
Macros and Programming
Use the Symphony API andSDK to create applications.
Related resources
Lotus Symphony wiki
Tips, videos, articles, community contributions,technical content for users and developers.Learning Center
Getting started, videos, tutorials, reference cards,product tours.Learning Widget
Get the learning widget in your sidebar so you canhave immediate access to videos, tutorials, andproduct tours.Lotus Symphony Web Site
Forums, support, translated multimedia, plugins,developer resources, latest product downloads.Developer Resources
API documentation, XPD solutions,programmability workshops, creating widgets, andmore.
IBM Lotus Symphony Help
Welcome to IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ help. Here you'll find task-based and reference help for theLotus Symphony editing tools. Use the search field and conduct a full-text on any topic. New LotusSymphony users will want to check out the extensive list of learning videos, tours and tutorials on theLotus Symphony wiki. If you are a former Microsoft Office user and want to learn equivalent keyboardand toolbar short cuts in Symphony, see the Lotus Symphony reference cards available in the wiki.
Feedback | Trademarks
1. IBM Lotus Symphony
What's new in Lotus Symphony 3
IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ offers better visual design, easier access, and more useful functions to assist your work.
General
More Sidebar Panels
The sidebar contains panels to specify the properties, style lists, slide templates, animation effects, slide transitionand so on. In Lotus Symphony 3, more properties panels are added, including cell appearance property panel inSpreadsheets, graphic and page settings panel in Documents, color palette, eyedropper, image animation and 3Deffects panel in Presentations.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
33 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Customizing toolbar
You can customize the toolbar settings in Toolbar Preferences.
VBA scripts
VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) is a programming language used in most Microsoft® Office applications. You canrun Microsoft VBA code directly in Lotus Symphony.
Using live text
Live text recognizes and identifies particular content types, such as person, e-mail or software problem reportnumbers. You can save time by clicking live text to perform an action. You can click the Live text button to select anappropriate action, such as click live text of a name to search it in Google.
Inserting audio and video files
Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
Clip Art
You can find brand new clip art in Lotus Symphony gallery.
Inserting OLE object
Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
Getting updates automatically
Lotus Symphony can automatically check for updates and remind you if there is any. You can set the periods for thetwo actions.
Opening in new window
You can open the tab of a document in a new window.
Documents
Master document
You can use a master document to organize complex projects, such as a book.
AutoText
You can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the textlater on. If you want, you can also store formatted text.
Comments
You can insert, edit, delete and print comments in Lotus Symphony Documents.
Fields
In Lotus Symphony, fields are used for data that changes. More fields are supported in Lotus Symphony 3.
Nested table
You can create a nested table in a table cell.
Multi-page view layout
You can define the number of pages displayed on screen in print preview.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
34 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Selecting rectangle region of text
You can select a rectangular block of text in block selection mode.
Presentations
Multi-monitor display
You can display your presentation on multiple screens.
More animation effects
You can find more animation effects in Lotus Symphony 3.
More table styles
You can easily apply a design style to the selected table, with the options available in the Table Design section of theProperties panel. The section is enabled when you select a table on a presentation page.
Tab view
You can switch to one of four different views in a presentation by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the screen.
Copying and pasting animation effects
You can copy and paste pages or objects together with the animation effects.
Spreadsheets
Sheet specific zoom
You can reduce or enlarge the screen display of the current document by choosing specific zoom options on editingtoolbar.
Detective
With the Detective, you can trace the dependencies from the current formula cell to the cells in the spreadsheet.
Solve equations
You can solve an equation with a variable.
Solver
You can solve equations with multiple unknown variables by Solve Equations methods.
Scenario
You can create a list of values to select from for a given cell or group of cells. The contents of these cells changewhen you select different items from the list.
Charts
New Chart Wizard
You can choose chart type, specify data range, edit data series and enter chart elements in the new chart wizard.
Flexible data labels
You can select a number format for data labels in charts or select the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
35 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
With IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents, you can create simple or highly structured documents includinggraphics, tables, charts, and spreadsheets. You can save the documents in a variety of formats.
You can use Lotus Symphony Documents to create both basic documents such as memos, letters, and resumes, andcomplex documents complete with bibliographies, reference tables, and indexes.
In addition to useful tools such as spell check and instant corrections, Lotus Symphony Documents also offers a widevariety of features for designing documents. The style list is used to create and modify styles for paragraphs,individual characters, frames, and pages. The navigator helps you navigate large documents, display documents in anoutline view, and keep track of objects that you insert into your document.
Lotus Symphony Documents has an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculationsor logical links. You can easily create a table in a document and employ the calculation function to performcalculations.
The Lotus Symphony Documents drawing tool lets you create drawing objects. You can also insert graphics andmodify the image attributes through the Properties panel. In addition, the Clip Art provides a collection of graphicsorganized by theme.
Entering text quickly
This section contains topics on how to enter text quickly.
Spell checking and finding synonyms
This section contains topics about spell checking.
Working with tables in documents
This section introduces operations that you can take with tables.
Putting objects in documents
This section introduces how to put objects in documents.
Using sections and frames
This section introduces how to use sections, edit sections, and insert sections.
Creating tables of contents or indexes
This sections introduces how to create table of contents or indexes.
Navigating text documents
You can use the navigator to navigate text documents.
Viewing Fields
Creating styles
This section introduces how to create styles for documents.
Formatting text documents
This section introduces how to format text documents.
Master Documents and Subdocuments
Inserting Cross-References
Merging fields into documents
You can send out batches of letters that merge fields from a data source. You can select a data source and mergeits fields into a new document, and then you can either print the documents or send them by e-mail.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
36 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Previewing a Page Before Printing
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
Selecting Printer Paper Trays
You can specify different paper sources for your document.
Using the searching and replacing function in documents
You can find and replace text using wildcards in a document.
Docking and Resizing Windows
Counting Words
Using Shortcut Keys (Lotus Symphony Documents Accessibility)
Calculating with documents
You can perform calculations in documents.
Menus and toolbars in Documents
This section provides a general overview of menus and toolbars in Lotus Symphony Documents.
Creating a nested table
You can create a nested table in IBM Lotus Symphony Documents.
Setting bullets and numbering in multiple table cells
You can set the bullets and numbering style in multiple table cells at one time.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entering text quickly
This section contains topics on how to enter text quickly.
Inserting an Entire Text Document
Navigating and selecting with the keyboard
Using the direct cursor
Inserting graphics
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting an Entire Text Document
Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file.1.
Choose Create - File.2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
37 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click OK.3.
The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file ischanged. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as alink.
Inserting an Entire Text Document as a Link
Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file.1.
Choose Create - Section.2.
On the Section tab page, type a name in the New Section box, and then select the Link check box.3.
In the File Name box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button ( ...) and locatethe file.
If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the Sectionsbox.
4.
If you want, set the formatting options for the section.5.
Click Insert.6.
Symphony automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. Tomanually update the contents of the section, choose Tools - Update - Update All.
Parent topic: Entering text quickly
Related reference
Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text FramesEmphasizing textUsing frames to center text on a pageUsing Toolbars
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Navigating and selecting with the keyboard
You can navigate through a IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents and make selections with the keyboard.
Key Function + Ctrl key
Right/leftarrow keys
Moves the cursor onecharacter to the left orto the right.
Moves the cursor one word to the left or to theright.
Up/downarrow keys
Moves the cursor upor down one line.
(Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
38 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Key Function + Ctrl key
Home Moves the cursor tothe beginning of thecurrent line.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of thedocument.
Home
In a table
Moves the cursor tothe beginning of thecontents in the currentcell.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contentsof the current cell. Press again to move the cursorto the first cell in the table. Press again to movethe cursor to the beginning of the document.
End Moves the cursor tothe end of the currentline.
Moves the cursor to the end of the document
End
In a table
Moves to the end ofthe contents in thecurrent cell.
Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of thecurrent cell. Press again to move the cursor to thelast cell in the table. Press again to move thecursor to the end of the document.
PgUp Scrolls up one page. Moves the cursor to the header.
PgDn Scroll down one page. Moves the cursor to the footer.
Parent topic: Entering text quickly
Related reference
Keyboard navigationUsing Shortcut Keys (Lotus Symphony Documents Accessibility)Shortcuts (Lotus Symphony Accessibility)
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using the direct cursor
The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page by setting paragraph indent and tabs.
To set the behavior of the direct cursor, click File > Preferences > Symphony > Lotus® Symphony™ Documents >Formatting Aids.
Parent topic: Entering text quickly
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting graphics
IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents allows you to insert graphics from other files, galleries. You can also importcharts and graphics from spreadsheets or presentations. There are several ways to insert a graphic object in adocument.
Inserting a Graphic From a File
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
39 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Inserting graphics from Presentations
Inserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-Drop
Inserting a Scanned Image
Inserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
Parent topic: Entering text quickly
Related reference
Drawing a graphicOpening the Drawing barInserting a Graphic From a FileInserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-DropInserting a Scanned ImageInserting graphics from PresentationsInserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text DocumentWrapping Text Around ObjectsContour Editor
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.4.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting a Graphic From a File
Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic.1.
Choose Create - Graphic from file .2.
Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click Open.3.
By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in.
Parent topic: Inserting graphics
Related reference
Drawing a graphicOpening the Drawing barInserting graphicsInserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-DropInserting a Scanned ImageInserting graphics from PresentationsInserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.4.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting graphics from Presentations
Open the document where you want to insert the graphic object.1.Open the presentation containing the graphic need to be copied.2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
40 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Right click the graphic and click Copy in the presentation.3.Right click in the document where you want to insert the graphic, and click Paste.4.
Parent topic: Inserting graphics
Related reference
Drawing a graphicOpening the Drawing barInserting graphicsInserting a Graphic From a FileInserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-DropInserting a Scanned ImageInserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.4.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-Drop
You can drag-and-drop an object from the clip art into a text document, spreadsheet, or presentation.
To replace a clip art object that you inserted in a document, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a different clip artobject onto the object.
Parent topic: Inserting graphics
Related reference
Drawing a graphicOpening the Drawing barInserting graphicsInserting a Graphic From a FileInserting a Scanned ImageInserting graphics from PresentationsInserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.4.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting a Scanned Image
To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must beinstalled.
The scanner must support the TWAIN standard.
Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image.1.
Choose Create - Graphic from File , and choose the scanning source from the submenu.2.
Follow the scanning instructions.3.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
41 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Parent topic: Inserting graphics
Related reference
Drawing a graphicOpening the Drawing barInserting graphicsInserting a Graphic From a FileInserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-DropInserting graphics from PresentationsInserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.1.4.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets Chart into a Text Document
You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet.
To insert a copy of a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets chart in a text document
Open the Lotus® Symphony™ document that you want to copy the chart to.1.Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy.2.In the spreadsheet, right click the chart.3.Click Copy.4.Right click in the text document where you want to insert the chart.5.Click Paste.6.
You can resize and move the chart in the text document. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart.
Parent topic: Inserting graphics
Related reference
Drawing a graphicOpening the Drawing barInserting graphicsInserting a Graphic From a FileInserting Graphics From the Clip Art With Drag-and-DropInserting a Scanned ImageInserting graphics from Presentations
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Spell checking and finding synonyms
This section contains topics about spell checking.
Automatically Check Spelling
Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary
Checking spelling in other languages
IBM Lotus Symphony can check spelling in more than one language, provided that you have installed dictionaries forthe other languages.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
42 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Checking spelling manually
You can manually check the spelling of a text selection or an entire document. The spellcheck process starts at thecurrent cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.2.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Automatically Check Spelling
You can have Lotus® Symphony™ automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelledwords with a red wavy line.
To check spelling automatically while you type:
Click Tools > Show Spelling Errors.1.
Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, orfrom the Instant Changes submenu.
If you choose a word from the Instant Changes submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word areautomatically added to the Instant Changes list for the current language. To view the Instant Changes list,choose Tools - Instant Corrections Options, and then click the Replace tab.
You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add.
2.
Parent topic: Spell checking and finding synonyms
Related reference
Checking spelling manuallyChecking spelling in other languagesChecking spelling in all editorsUsing automatic and manual hyphenation in IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.2.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary
Click File > Preferences > Symphony > Language Settings > Spell Check.1.
Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined list, and then click Edit.2.
Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete.3.
Parent topic: Spell checking and finding synonyms
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
43 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.2.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Checking spelling in other languages
IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ can check spelling in more than one language, provided that you have installeddictionaries for the other languages.
Click File > Preferences > Symphony > Language Settings > Spell Check.1.
Select the dictionary of the languages you want to check from the User-defined dictionaries list.
Note: To assign the underlined word to another installed language, right-click the word, and then select Add >standard.dic.
2.
Parent topic: Spell checking and finding synonyms
Related reference
Checking spelling manuallyAutomatically Check SpellingChecking spelling in all editorsUsing automatic and manual hyphenation in IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.2.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Checking spelling manually
You can manually check the spelling of a text selection or an entire document. The spellcheck process starts at thecurrent cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection.
Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check.1.
Click Tools > Spell Check or press F7. When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spellcheckwindow opens and offers a suggested correction. IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ first searches the user-defineddictionaries, and then searches the default dictionaries.
2.
Take one of the following actions:
To accept the correction, highlight the word you want to use, and click Change.Type a correction in the Word box, and then click Change.To add the word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add.
Note: To open the Spellcheck window in a document that does not have misspelled words, type a misspelledword, and then choose Tools > Spell Check or press F7.
3.
Parent topic: Spell checking and finding synonyms
Related reference
Automatically Check SpellingChecking spelling in other languagesChecking spelling in all editorsUsing automatic and manual hyphenation in IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
44 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Working with tables in documents
This section introduces operations that you can take with tables.
Adjusting number recognition in tables
Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard
Deleting tables or the contents of a table
You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table.
Adding tables
You can create a table using a menu command.
Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page
Resizing rows and columns
You can resize the width of table cells and columns, as well as change the height of table rows.
Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adjusting number recognition in tables
By default, the IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ automatically format dates that you enter into a table according to theregional settings specified in your operating system.
Right-click in a table cell and click Number Recognition . When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front ofthe Number Recognition command.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard
When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of Rows and Columns options determinehow the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table withFixed row and column dimensions if space permits.
Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are madeusing the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.
To set the Behavior of Rows and Columns options for tables in text documents, choose File - Preferences -
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
45 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Symphony - Lotus Symphony Documents - Tables. There are three display modes for tables:
Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, theadjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.
Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example,when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remainsconstant.
Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Deleting tables or the contents of a table
You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table.
To delete an entire table: Select from the end of the paragraph before the table to the start of the paragraph afterthe table, and then press the Delete key.To delete a table row: Click the row that you want to delete and then select Table > Delete > Rows.To delete a table column: Click the column that you want to delete and then select Table > Delete > Columns.To delete the contents of a table: Drag and click to select the table contents. And then press the Delete key.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Related reference
Adding tables
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding tables
You can create a table using a menu command.
To create a table:
Position the cursor where you want to insert the table in your document.1.
Click Table > Create Table.2.
Enter a name for the table in the Name field.3.
Specify the number of columns and rows in the Size area.4.
In the Options area, select the Column header check box to include a heading row in the table. Specify thenumber of rows that you want to repeat as headers. Select Don't split table check box to prevent the tablefrom spanning more than one page. Select Display border to add a border to the table cells.
5.
Click the Instant Formatting button, and then select a predefined layout for table in the Instant Formattingwindow.
6.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
46 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Click OK.
Note: You can also nest tables within tables.
7.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Related reference
Deleting tables or the contents of a tableSelecting Tables, Rows, and Columns
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page
You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans.
Choose Table - Create Table.1.
Select the Heading and the Repeat heading check boxes.2.
Select the number of rows and columns for the table.3.
Click OK.4.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Resizing rows and columns
You can resize the width of table cells and columns, as well as change the height of table rows.
To change the width of a column, do one of the following:
Position the mouse pointer over a column dividing line in the table so that the pointer becomes a separator icon,and then drag the line to the desired new location.Position the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the horizontal ruler so that the pointer becomes aseparator icon, and then drag the line to a new location.Place the cursor in a cell in the column. Press Alt, and then press the Left Arrow or the Right Arrow.
To change the width of a cell, press Alt+Ctrl, and then press the Left Arrow or the Right Arrow.
To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, press Alt, and then press the Up Arrow or theDown Arrow.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Related reference
Using RulersSetting tabs
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
47 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Selecting Measurement Units
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.3.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard
You can add or delete rows or columns in table as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard.
To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press Alt+Insert, and then press the up or down arrowkey. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab.
To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Alt+Insert, and then press the left or right arrow key.
To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press Alt+Insert, and then hold down Ctrl while you press the left orright arrow key.
To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press Alt+Delete, and then press the up or down arrow key.
To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Alt+Delete, and then press the left or the right arrow key.
To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press Alt+Delete, hold down Ctrl, and then pressthe left or the right arrow key.
Parent topic: Working with tables in documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Putting objects in documents
This section introduces how to put objects in documents.
Positioning Objects
Wrapping Text Around Objects
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.4.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Positioning Objects
You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, ormoves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available:
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
48 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Anchoring options
Option Effect
Ascharacter Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the
selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the linecontaining the item is increased.
Tocharacter
Anchors the selected item to a character.
Toparagraph
Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
To page Anchors the selected item to the current page.
To frame Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position ananchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click theitem, and then choose an option from the Anchor submenu.
Parent topic: Putting objects in documents
Related reference
Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.4.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Wrapping Text Around Objects
Select the graphic object.1.
Choose Layout - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.2.
Specifying the Wrapping Properties
Select the object.1.
Choose Layout - Properties - Graphic Properties, and then click the Wrap tab.2.
Set the options that you want.3.
Click OK.4.
To change the wrapping contour of a graphic:
You can change the shape that the text wraps around.
Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour.1.
Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark).2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
49 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Close the Contour Editor window.3.
Parent topic: Putting objects in documents
Related reference
Contour EditorInserting graphics
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using sections and frames
This section introduces how to use sections, edit sections, and insert sections.
Using Sections
Editing Sections
Inserting Sections
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.5.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using Sections
Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways:
To prevent text from being edited.
To show or hide text.
To reuse text and graphics from other Lotus® Symphony™ documents.
To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style.
A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break isautomatically inserted at the end of the text.
You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire Lotus Symphony document as a section into another textdocument. You can also insert sections from a Lotus Symphony document as links in another text document, or in thesame document.
To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind thesection, and then press Alt+Enter.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
50 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Sections and Columns
You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into asection that contains one column.
A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style.
Parent topic: Using sections and frames
Related reference
Inserting SectionsEditing SectionsGeneral Glossary
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.5.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Editing Sections
You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document.
Choose Layout - Sections .1.
In the Section list, click the section you want to modify. You can press Ctrl+A to select all sections in the list,and you can Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select some sections.
2.
Do one of the following:
To convert a section into normal text, click Remove.
To make a section read-only, select the Protected check box in the Write Protection area.
To hide a section, select the Hide check box in the Hide area.
3.
Set the other options that you want, and then click OK.4.
Parent topic: Using sections and frames
Related reference
Using SectionsInserting SectionsGeneral Glossary
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.5.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting Sections
You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
51 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document.
To insert a new section:
Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to asection.
If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph.
1.
Choose Create - Section.2.
In the New Section box, type a name for the section.3.
Set the options for the section, and then click Insert.4.
To insert a section as a link:
Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document.
When you open a document that contains linked sections, Lotus® Symphony™ prompts you to update the contentsof the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links.
Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section.1.
Choose Create - Section.2.
In the New Section box, type a name for the section.3.
In the Link area, select the Link check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box toautomatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed.
4.
Click the browse button ( ...) next to the File name box.5.
Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert.6.
In the Section box, select the section that you want to insert.7.
Click Insert.8.
Parent topic: Using sections and frames
Related reference
Using SectionsEditing SectionsGeneral Glossary
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
52 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Creating tables of contents or indexes
This sections introduces how to create table of contents or indexes.
Setting outline numbering for paragraph styles
Creating a user-defined index
You can create your own indexes in your document.
Creating a table of contents
You can create a table of contents in your document at the current cursor position.
Creating Alphabetical Indexes
Indexes Covering Several Documents
Editing or deleting entries
After you insert index entries into your document, you can edit or delete the entries.
Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents
Adding index entries
You can add and edit the index or table of contents entries.
Assigning style attributes to index levels
You can apply different paragraph styles, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color ofindexes using the Insert Index/Table window.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting outline numbering for paragraph styles
You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also addchapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the topof the outline hierarchy.
To add automatic numbering to a heading style:
Choose Layout - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab.1.
In the Paragraph Style box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to.2.
In the Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click OK.3.
To remove automatic outline numbering from a heading paragraph:
Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number.1.
Press the Backspace key to delete the number.2.
To use a custom paragraph style as a heading:
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
53 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Layout - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab.1.
Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box.2.
Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list.3.
Click OK.4.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Adding Chapter Numbers to CaptionsAdding captionsCaptions
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating a user-defined index
You can create your own indexes in your document.
Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.1.
Click Create > References > Entry.2.
Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index field.3.
Type a name for the index in the Name field, and click OK.4.
Click Insert to add the one or more selected words to the new index.5.
Click Close.6.
To insert a user-defined index into a document, perform the following steps:
Click the document where you want to insert the index.a.Click Create > References > Indexes ant Tables.b.On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type field.c.Select any options that you want.d.Click OK.e.
7.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Creating a table of contentsAdding index entriesUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsAssigning style attributes to index levelsEditing or deleting entriesCreating Alphabetical IndexesIndexes Covering Several Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
54 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.6.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating a table of contents
You can create a table of contents in your document at the current cursor position.
Apply predefined heading paragraph styles to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents.1.
Click your document and place your cursor where you want to create the table of contents.2.
Click Create > References > Indexes and Tables and then select the Index/Table tab.3.
Select Table of Contents in the Type box.4.
Select the Outline check box.5.
If there is at least one custom paragraph style that inherits from a headline style, the Additional Styles checkbox will be checked, and the custom paragraph style will be assigned to the corresponding TOC level. To edita custom style as a table of contents entry, click the ... button. In the Assign Styles window, click the style in thelist, and then click >> or << to define the TOC level for that paragraph style.
6.
Click OK.7.
After you add content to your document, you can update the table of contents. Do one of the following:
Click the table of contents to select it, then right-click and click Update Index/Table.Click Tools > Update > All Indexes and Tables.
Note: In a document, a TOC can be inserted many times, and each TOC is created with the default settings.However, editing one TOC's settings does not impact another TOC's settings.
8.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Adding index entriesUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsAssigning style attributes to index levelsEditing or deleting entriesCreating Alphabetical IndexesCreating a user-defined indexIndexes Covering Several Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating Alphabetical Indexes
Click in your document where you want to insert the index.1.
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables.2.
On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box.3.
If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File, and then4.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
55 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.
Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. Forexample, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then selectAlphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab.
5.
Click OK.6.
To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table.7.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Creating a table of contentsAdding index entriesUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsAssigning style attributes to index levelsEditing or deleting entriesCreating a user-defined indexIndexes Covering Several Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Indexes Covering Several Documents
There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents:
Create an index in each individual document, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then editthem.
Select each index, choose Create - Section , and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, chooseCreate - Section, select Link, click the browse button (...), and then locate and insert a named index section.
Create a master document, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then chooseCreate - References - Indexes and Tables.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Master Documents and SubdocumentsWorking with Master Documents and SubdocumentsNavigator for Master DocumentsCreating a table of contentsAdding index entriesUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsAssigning style attributes to index levelsEditing or deleting entriesCreating Alphabetical IndexesCreating a user-defined index
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
56 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.6.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Editing or deleting entries
After you insert index entries into your document, you can edit or delete the entries.
Index entries are inserted as fields into your document, click entry field in your document, click View andensure that Field Shadings is selected.
1.
Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document.2.
Right click, and select Index Entry. Do one of the following:
To change the entry, enter different text in the Entry field.To remove the entry, click Delete.
3.
To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit IndexEntry window.
4.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Creating a table of contentsAdding index entriesUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsAssigning style attributes to index levelsCreating Alphabetical IndexesCreating a user-defined indexIndexes Covering Several Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents
Place the cursor in the index or table of contents.
If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose File - Preferences - Symphony - LotusSymphony Documents - Formatting Aids, and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas.
1.
Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu.2.
You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents,choose Edit Index/Table, click Index/Table tab, and then clear the Protected from manual changes check box.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Creating a table of contentsAdding index entriesAssigning style attributes to index levelsEditing or deleting entriesCreating Alphabetical IndexesCreating a user-defined index
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
57 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Indexes Covering Several Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding index entries
You can add and edit the index or table of contents entries.
To define index or table of contents entries, perform the following steps:
Click a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry.1.
Click Create > References > Entry , and do one of the following:
To change the text that displays in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry field. The text that youtype here does not replace the selected text in the document.To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts.To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index,and then click OK .
2.
You can type the text in Entry field, 1st key field, and 2nd key field, to change the text that displays in theindex.
1st key
Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select cold, andenter weather as the first key, the index entry is weather, cold.
2nd key
Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the first key. For example, if you select cold, and enterweather as the first key and winter as the second key, the index entry is weather, winter, cold.
Main entry
Makes the selected text into the main entry in an alphabetical index. IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ displays thepage number of the main entry in a different format than the other entries in the index.
Apply to all similar texts
Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers,frames, and captions is not included. To include all occurrences of a text passage in an index, select thetext, click Edit > Find and Replace, and click Find All. Then click Create > References > Entry and clickInsert.
Match case
Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
Whole words only
Searches for whole words that are identical to the search text.
3.
Click Insert.4.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Creating a table of contentsUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsAssigning style attributes to index levelsEditing or deleting entriesCreating Alphabetical IndexesCreating a user-defined indexIndexes Covering Several Documents
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
58 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.6.9. IBM Lotus Symphony
Assigning style attributes to index levels
You can apply different paragraph styles, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexesusing the Insert Index/Table window.
To apply a different paragraph style to an index level, perform the following steps:
Position the cursor within the index and click to select it.1.Right-click the index, and then select Edit Index/Table.2.Click the Styles tab.3.Click an index level in the Levels list.4.Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Styles list.5.Click the less than(<) button to assign the style.6.Click OK.7.
Parent topic: Creating tables of contents or indexes
Related reference
Creating a table of contentsAdding index entriesUpdating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of ContentsEditing or deleting entriesCreating Alphabetical IndexesCreating a user-defined indexIndexes Covering Several Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Navigating text documents
You can use the navigator to navigate text documents.
Arranging Chapters in the Navigator
Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator
Navigator for Text Documents
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.7.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Arranging Chapters in the Navigator
You can move headings and subordinate text up and down in a document text by using the Navigator. You can alsopromote and demote heading levels. To use this feature, format the headings in your document with one of thepredefined heading paragraph styles. To use a custom paragraph style for a heading, choose Layout - Style List,
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
59 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
select the style in the Paragraph Style box, and then double-click a number in the Levels list.
To quickly move the text cursor to a heading in the document, double-click the heading in theNavigator list.
To dock the Navigator, drag the title bar to the edge of the workspace. To undock the Navigator, double-click itsframe.
To Move a Heading Up or Down in the Document
Ensure that all heading levels are shown in the Navigator. By default all levels are shown.See steps below how to change the heading levels that are shown.
Press F5 to open the Navigator.1.
On the Navigator, click the Content View icon .2.
Do one of the following:
Drag a heading to a new location in the Navigator list.a.
Click a heading in the Navigator list, and then click the Promote Chapter or Demote Chapter icon .
b.
3.
To move the heading without the subordinate text, hold down Ctrl while you drag or clickthe Promote Chapter or Demote Chapter icons.
To Promote or Demote the Level of a Heading
Select the heading in the Navigator list.1.
Click the Promote Level or Demote Level icon .2.
To Change the Number of Heading Levels That Are Displayed
Click the Heading Levels Shown icon , and then select a number from the list.
Parent topic: Navigating text documents
Related reference
Navigator for Document OverviewInserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.7.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
60 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator
You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-referenceitems from other Lotus® Symphony™ documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in LotusSymphony, you are taken to the cross-referenced item.
Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference.1.
Press F5 to open the Navigator.2.
In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference.
3.
In the Navigator list, right click the the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink, and then select Insert asHyperlink.
4.
Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document.5.
The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink.
Parent topic: Navigating text documents
Related reference
Arranging Chapters in the NavigatorNavigator for Document Overview
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.7.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Navigator for Text Documents
The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks.
To open the Navigator, press F5.1.
To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window.2.
Parent topic: Navigating text documents
Related reference
Finding and Replacing in Lotus Symphony DocumentsUsing wildcards in text searchesSearching for AttributesList of Regular ExpressionsRemoving Line Breaks
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
61 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Viewing Fields
In Lotus® Symphony™ documents, fields are used for data that changes.
Viewing fieldsFields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the fieldcontent, click View > Fields.
To display or hide field highlighting in a document, click View >Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature,click Files > Preferences > Symphony > Color Scheme, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings.
To change the color of field shadings, click Files > Preferences > Symphony > Color Scheme , locate the Fieldshadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box.
Field propertiesMost field types in a document store and display variable values.
The following field types execute an action when you click the field:
Table 1. Field properties
Field Type Property
Placeholder Opens a dialog box to insert the object for which the placeholder wasset.
InsertReference
Moves the mouse pointer to the reference.
Input Field Opens a dialog box to edit the contents of the field.
Note: Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest themouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tips option is selectedin the Help menu.
Updating fieldsTo update all of the fields in a document, press F9 (Mac special use).
Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field
Converting a Field into Text
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Related reference
Querying User Data in Fields or ConditionsConditional TextHiding TextFormula
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.8.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field
You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does notupdate.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
62 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - Fields - Others and click the Document tab.1.
Click 'Date' in the Type list and do one of the following:2.
To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click 'Date' in the Select list.
To insert the date as a field that does not update, click 'Date (fixed)' in the Select list.
Parent topic: Viewing Fields
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.8.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Converting a Field into Text
You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannotchange the text back into a field.
Select the field and choose Edit - Cut.1.
Choose Edit - Paste Special.2.
Click "Unformatted text" in the Selection list, and then click OK.3.
Parent topic: Viewing Fields
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating styles
This section introduces how to create styles for documents.
Templates and Styles
Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages
Creating and applying page styles
IBM Lotus Symphony uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background,margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you mustcreate and apply a custom page style to the page.
Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page
Using Styles From Another Document or Template
Creating new styles from selections
You can quickly create a new style from an existing style that you have applied manual formatting to.
Updating Styles From Selections
Creating a Document Template
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
63 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Changing the Default Template
Applying Styles in Fill Style Mode
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Templates and Styles
A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. Atemplate is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and characterstyles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with thesame styles.
Unless you specify otherwise, every new Lotus® Symphony™ is based on the default template.
Lotus Symphony has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types of text documents,such as business letters.
Viewing and Organizing Styles in Templates
You can view and organize styles in templates in the Template Organizer window. Click File > Template Organizerto open the window.
In the template category list, double click the template folder that you want to view the styles in it. Then double clickStyles under the template. The styles in the template display.To copy a style, drag it to another template or document listed in the area next to the template area.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Applying Styles in Fill Style ModeCopying formatting with duplicate formatting for DocumentsCreating new styles from selectionsUpdating Styles From SelectionsApplying formatting styleCreating a Document TemplateChanging the Default TemplateUsing Styles From Another Document or TemplateSaving Templates
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages
Lotus® Symphony™ can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages(right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers andfooters on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottomof the workplace.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
64 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Layout - Style List, and then select Page Styles from the Style Type list.1.
In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify.2.
Click the Style tab.3.
Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK.4.
In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify.5.
Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK.6.
Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles andFormatting window.
7.
To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Create - Header, and choose the page style that you want to addthe header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header.
To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Create - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to addthe footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer.
If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the"First Page" style to the title page.
Suppressing printout of empty pages
If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Lotus Symphony Documents inserts anempty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and fromexporting to PDF by doing the following steps:
Choose File - Preferences - Symphony - Lotus Symphony Documents - Print.1.
Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages.2.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Creating and applying page stylesAbout Headers and FootersAdding manual breaks
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating and applying page styles
IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation,background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document,you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
65 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Define a new page style.
Click Layout > Style List.1.Select Page Styles from the Style type list.2.Click the New button.3.In the Style window, select the Style tab and type a name in the Name field.4.Optional: To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in yourdocument from the Next style field.
5.
Optional: To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name from the Next style field.6.Optional: To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style.7.Optional: Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK .8.
Apply a page style.
Click the page that you want to apply the page style to.1.Click Layout > Style List.2.Select Page Styles from the Style type list.3.Select the desired page style from the style list and click Apply .4.
Apply a page style to a new page.
Click the document where you want a new page to start.1.Click Create > Break.2.Select Page break and then click OK.3.Click Layout > Style List.4.Select Page Styles from the Style type list.5.Select the desired page style from the style list and click Apply.6.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Defining Borders for PagesDefining Borders for ParagraphsDefining Borders for Tables and Table CellsDefining borders for objects in DocumentsAlternating Page Styles on Odd and Even PagesAbout Headers and FootersAdding manual breaks
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page
You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it.
For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays adifferent header.
Open a new text document, choose Layout - Style List, and then select Page Styles from the Style Type list.1.
Click the New icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu.2.
Type a name for the page in the Style name box, and then click OK.3.
Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page.4.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
66 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - Header, and choose the new page style from the list.5.
Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header.6.
Choose Create - Break.7.
In the Type area, select Page break and then select 'Default' from the Style box.8.
Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom Page Style with a different header.9.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
About Headers and FootersDefining different headers and footersInserting a chapter name and number in a header or footerFormatting headers or footers
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using Styles From Another Document or Template
You can import styles from another document or template into the current document.
Choose Layout - Style List to open the Style List window.1.
Click Load styles at the bottom.2.
Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replacestyles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use inthe Templates list, and then click OK.
a.
Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, click the name, and then clickOpen.
b.
4.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Creating a Document TemplateTemplates and StylesChanging the Default TemplateSaving Templates
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
67 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.9.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating new styles from selections
You can quickly create a new style from an existing style that you have applied manual formatting to.
Click Layout > Style List.1.Click the Style type that you want to create.2.Right-click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you appliedmanual formatting to. Select Create Style from Selection from the context menu.
3.
Type a name in the Style name field and click OK.4.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Applying Styles in Fill Style ModeCopying formatting with duplicate formatting for DocumentsTemplates and StylesUpdating Styles From SelectionsApplying formatting style
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Updating Styles From Selections
Choose Layout - Style List.1.
Select the style type that you want to update.2.
In the document, click where you want to copy the updated style from. For example, click a paragraph that youapplied manual formatting to.
3.
In the Style List window, click the style that you want to update.4.
Click the arrow next to the Modify icon and choose Update Style from the submenu.5.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Applying Styles in Fill Style ModeCopying formatting with duplicate formatting for DocumentsTemplates and StylesCreating new styles from selectionsApplying formatting style
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating a Document Template
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
68 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents.
Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want.1.
Choose File - Save to Template Organizer.2.
In the Template name field, type a name for the new template.3.
Select a template category in the Category list.4.
Click OK.5.
To create a document based on the template, choose File - New - From Template, select Documents, select atemplate, and click Open.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Templates and StylesChanging the Default TemplateUsing Styles From Another Document or TemplateSaving Templates
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.9. IBM Lotus Symphony
Changing the Default Template
The default template contains the default formatting information for new text documents. If you want, you can create anew template and use it as the default template.
Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want.1.
Choose File - Save to Template Organizer.2.
In the Template name field, type a name for the new template.3.
In the Category list, select "My Templates", and then click OK.4.
Choose File - Template Organizer.5.
In the category list, double-click the "My Templates" folder.6.
Right-click the template that you created, and choose Set as Default Template.7.
Click Close.8.
To reset the default template:
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
69 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose File - Template Organizer.1.
Right-click a folder in the category list, choose Reset Default Template.2.
Click Close.3.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Changing Default TemplatesOpening the Template Organizer windowCreating a Document TemplateTemplates and StylesUsing Styles From Another Document or TemplateSaving Templates
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.9.10. IBM Lotus Symphony
Applying Styles in Fill Style Mode
You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and text styles, in your document by using the Fill Style in the StyleList window.
Choose Layout - Style List.1.
Select a style type.2.
Click the style that you want to apply, and then click the Fill Style icon .3.
Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click.4.
Optional: To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release. Press Esc whenfinished.
5.
Parent topic: Creating styles
Related reference
Copying formatting with duplicate formatting for DocumentsTemplates and StylesCreating new styles from selectionsUpdating Styles From SelectionsApplying formatting style
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10. IBM Lotus Symphony
Formatting text documents
This section introduces how to format text documents.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
70 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Changing the Case of Text
You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in aselection.
Hiding Text
Defining different headers and footers
You can use different headers and footers on separate pages in your document, as long as the pages use differentpage styles. IBM Lotus Symphony Documents provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Leftpage and Right page, and you can also create a custom page style.
Inserting a chapter name and number in a header or footer
Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options forthe paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles.
Quickly Applying Paragraph Styles
Put your short description here; used for first paragraph and abstract.
Applying Text Formatting While You Type
Resetting Font Attributes
Using frames to center text on a page
Emphasizing text
Rotating text in Documents
Working with page breaks
You can insert and delete page breaks in your document.
Making Text Superscript or Subscript
Adding Bullets
Adding Numbering
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Changing the Case of Text
You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection.
To capitalize text, perform the following steps:
Select the text that you want to capitalize.1.Do one of the following methods:
Click Layout > Change Case > Uppercase.Click Layout > Properties > Text Properties, click the Effects tab, and then select the type ofcapitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all of the letters in the selection. "Title" capitalizes thefirst letter of each word in the selection. "Small capitals" capitalizes every letter in the selection, but in areduced font size.
2.
To change text to lowercase, perform the following steps:
Select the text that you want to change to lowercase.1.Do one of the following methods:2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
71 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Click Layout > Change Case > Lowercase.Click Layout > Properties > Text Properties, click the Effects tab, and then select Lowercase in theEffects box.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Hiding Text
You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met.
Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text.
Click in your document and choose Create - Fields - Others.1.
Click the Variables tab and click "Set Variable" in the Type list.2.
Click "General" in the Format list.3.
Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example, "Hide".4.
Enter a value for the variable in the Value box, for example, "1".5.
To hide the variable in your document, select Invisible.6.
Click Insert.7.
To hide text:
Click in the document where you want to add the text.1.
Choose Create - Fields - Others and click the Functions tab.2.
Click "Hidden Text" in the Type list.3.
Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter"Hide==1".
4.
Type the text that you want to hide in the Hidden text box.5.
Click Insert.6.
To hide a paragraph:
Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text.1.
Choose Create - Fields - Others and click the Functions tab.2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
72 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the Type list.3.
Enter a statement in the Condition box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter"Hide==1".
4.
Click Insert.5.
You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu View - HiddenParagraphs. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph.
To hide a section:
Select the text that you want to hide in your document.1.
Choose Create - Section.2.
In the Hide area, select Hide, and then enter an expression in the Condition box. For example, using thevariable you previously defined, enter "Hide==1".
3.
Click Insert.4.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Querying User Data in Fields or ConditionsViewing FieldsConditional TextFormulaDisplaying Hidden TextCreating Non-printing TextInserting other fields such as document informationInsert Section
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Defining different headers and footers
You can use different headers and footers on separate pages in your document, as long as the pages use differentpage styles. IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents provides several predefined page styles, such as First page,Left page and Right page, and you can also create a custom page style.
You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner andouter page margins. To apply this option to a page style, click Layout > Properties > Page Properties, click thePage tab, and in the Layout settings area, select Mirrored in the Page layout field.
Follow these steps to use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document:
Open a new word document.1.Click Layout > Style List, and select Page Styles in the Style Type list.2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
73 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Right-click Right Page to select it from the Style list and clickModify.3.In the Page Properties window, click the Header tab.4.Select Header on and click OK.5.Right-click Left Page in the list of page styles and click Modify.6.In the Page Properties window, click the Header tab.7.Select Header on and click OK.8.Double-click Right Page in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.9.Enter text or graphics in the header for the left page style. After the next page is added to your document,enter text or graphics in the header for the right page style.
10.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
About Headers and FootersCreating a Page Style Based on the Current PageInserting a chapter name and number in a header or footerFormatting headers or footersDefining different headers and footers
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting a chapter name and number in a header or footer
Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options forthe paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles.
To create a paragraph style for chapter titles, perform the following steps:
Click Layout > Style List.1.Choose Paragraph Styles in the Style Type field, then select the paragraph style that you want to use forchapter titles in the Style list, for example, Heading 1.
2.
Click the Modify... button, select the Outline & Numbering tab, then select the Outline Level and NumberingStyle for the chapter titles in the Outline and Number fields respectively.
3.
Click OK.4.Click Layout > Outline Numbering to open the Outline Numbering window.5.On the Numbering tab page, select the same paragraph style as you have selected in the Style List window.6.Type Chapter followed by a space in the Before field.7.Enter a space in the After field.8.Click OK.9.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
About Headers and FootersCreating a Page Style Based on the Current PageDefining different headers and footersFormatting headers or footers
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Quickly Applying Paragraph Styles
Put your short description here; used for first paragraph and abstract.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
74 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To apply the paragraph style of the first paragraph to the second paragraph, take the
following steps:
Click at the end of the first paragraph.1.Press Delete until the second paragraph is added to the end of the first paragraph.2.Press Enter.3.
To apply the paragraph style of the second paragraph to the first paragraph, take the
following steps:
Click at the beginning of the second paragraph.1.Press Backspace until the second paragraph is added to the end of the first paragraph.2.Press Enter.3.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Applying Text Formatting While You Type
Click the text formatting options on the toolbar, such as the bold icon.1.Type the text that you want to format.2.When you finish, click the same text formatting options you clicked just now, such as the bold icon.3.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Resetting Font Attributes
To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Layout - DefaultFormatting.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using frames to center text on a page
To center text on a page, perform the following steps:
Select the text that you want to center on the page.1.Click Create > Frame.2.In the Anchor area, select To page.3.In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame.4.In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.5.Click OK.6.
Tip:
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
75 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then click Layout > Properties > Frame Properties. Clickthe Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Borderbox in the Line Arrangement area.
To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text FramesEmphasizing textInserting an Entire Text DocumentUsing Toolbars
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.9. IBM Lotus Symphony
Emphasizing text
Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document:
Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as bold .
Right-click in a paragraph, choose Paragraph Properties, set the options that you want, for example, the backgroundcolor, and then click OK .
Select the text, and then click Create Frame .
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text FramesUsing frames to center text on a pageInserting an Entire Text DocumentUsing ToolbarsRotating text in DocumentsOpening the drawing bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.10. IBM Lotus Symphony
Rotating text in Documents
You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object.1.
Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar.2.
Select the Text icon .3.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
76 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text.4.
Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate Icon on the toolbar.5.
Drag one of the corner handles of the text object.6.
You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotationangle or a new position for the object.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Emphasizing textOpening the drawing bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.11. IBM Lotus Symphony
Working with page breaks
You can insert and delete page breaks in your document.
Insert a manual page break.
Click your document where you want the new page to begin.1.Press Ctrl+Enter.2.
Delete a manual page break.
Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break.1.Press Backspace.2.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.12. IBM Lotus Symphony
Making Text Superscript or Subscript
Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript.1.
Do one of the following:2.
Click the superscript icon or subscript icon on the toolbar or Properties panel.
Press Ctrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and Ctrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Text Superscript / Subscript
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
77 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Setting position properties for text
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.13. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding Bullets
Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to.1.
On the toolbar, click the Bullets On/Off icon .2.
To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off iconon the toolbar.
Formatting Bullets
To change the formatting of bulleted list, choose Layout - Bullets and Numbering.
For example, to change the bulleting symbol:
Click the Options tab1.Select Graphics or Linked graphics in the Numbering list.2.Click the select button next to Grahpics.3.Select a graphic that you want to use as the bullet symbol from a file or from gallery.4.Set the other properties of the bullet symbol such as height, width, and alignment.5.
You can also click the Graphics tab, and then click a symbol style in the Selection area.
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Adding numbered or bulleted listsNumbering and Numbering StylesAdding NumberingCombining Numbered ListsAdding captionsDefining Number RangesModifying Numbering in a Numbered List
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding Numbering
Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to.1.
On the toolbar, click the Numbering On/Off icon .2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
78 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the Numberingobject toolbar.
3.
To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the NumberingOn/Off icon on the toolbar.
Formatting a Numbered List
To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose Layout > Bullets and Numbering.
Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions
Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type
Saving Documents in other formats
Changing the Outline Level of Numbered and Bulleted Lists
Combining Numbered Lists
Adding Line Numbers
Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List
Defining Number Ranges
Numbering and Numbering Styles
Parent topic: Formatting text documents
Related reference
Adding numbered or bulleted listsNumbering and Numbering StylesAdding BulletsCombining Numbered ListsAdding captionsDefining Number RangesModifying Numbering in a Numbered List
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions
You can include chapter numbers in captions.
Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the sectiontitles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the headingparagraph styles.
Select the item that you want to add a caption to.1.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
79 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - Caption.2.
Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering box. You also canenter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box.
3.
Click Options.4.
In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number.5.
Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separatorbox, and then click OK.
6.
In the Caption dialog, click OK.7.
Lotus® Symphony™ can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, ortable. Choose File - Preferences - Symphony - Lotus Symphony Documents - Captions.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Related reference
CaptionsAdding captionsSetting outline numbering for paragraph styles
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type
Lotus® Symphony™ can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type.
To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting
Choose Tools - Instant Corrections, click the Options tab, and then select Apply Numbering - Symbol.1.
Choose Tools - Instant Changes, and ensure that While Typing is selected.2.
The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the"Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style.
To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type
Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesisafter the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i).
1.
Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the nextnumber or bullet.
2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
80 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Press Enter again to finish the list.3.
You can start a numbered list with any number.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Saving Documents in other formats
Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog.1.
In the Save as type or File type list box, select the desired format.2.
Enter a name in the File name box and click Save.3.
If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in File - Preferences - Symphony -Load and Save - General in the Standard file format area.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Changing the Outline Level of Numbered and Bulleted Lists
To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph down one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and thenpress Tab.
To move a numbered or bulleted paragraph up one outline level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and thenpress Shift+Tab.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Combining Numbered Lists
You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
81 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To combine consecutive numbered lists:
Select all of the paragraphs in the lists.1.
On the toolbar, click the Numbering On/Off icon twice.2.
To create a numbered list from non-consecutive paragraphs:
Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character.1.
Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine.2.
On the toolbar, click the Numbering On/Off icon twice.3.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Related reference
Adding numbered or bulleted listsNumbering and Numbering StylesAdding BulletsAdding NumberingAdding captionsDefining Number RangesModifying Numbering in a Numbered List
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding Line Numbers
Lotus® Symphony™ can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Linenumbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting linenumber, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers.
To add line numbers to an entire document:
Choose Tools - Line Numbers.1.
Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want.2.
Click OK.3.
To add line numbers to specific paragraphs:
Choose Tools - Line Numbers.1.
Select Show numbering.2.
Click OK.3.
Press F11 (Mac special use) to open the Style List window, and then select the Paragraph Styles from the4.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
82 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Style type list.
Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify.
All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style.
5.
Click the Outline & Numbering tab.6.
In the Line Numbers area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box.7.
Click OK.8.
Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers.9.
Choose Layout - Properties - Paragraph Properties, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab.10.
Select Include this paragraph in line numbering.11.
Click OK.12.
You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to addline numbers to.
To specify the starting line number:
Click in a paragraph.1.
Choose Layout - Properties - Paragraph Properties, and then click the Numbering tab.2.
Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box.3.
Select Restart at the paragraph check box.4.
Enter a line number in the Start with box.5.
Click OK.6.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List
You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list startswith.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
83 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
If you want numbered headings, use the Layout - Style List menu command to assign anumbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the toolbar.
To remove the number from a paragraph in a numbered list:
Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from.1.
Do one of the following:2.
To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key.
To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the Numbering on/off icon on the toolbar.
To change the number that a numbered list starts with:
Click anywhere in the numbered list.1.
Choose Layout - Bullets and Numbering, and then click the Options tab.2.
Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box.3.
Click OK.4.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Related reference
Adding BulletsNumbering and Numbering StylesAdding NumberingCombining Numbered ListsAdding captionsDefining Number Ranges
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
Defining Number Ranges
You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document.
Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ".1.
Choose Create - Fields - Others, and then click the Variables tab.2.
Click "Number range" in the Type list.3.
Type "Quotation" in the Name box.4.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
84 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Do one of the following:
Type a number in the Value box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering.
Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the Level box.
5.
Click Insert, and then click Close.6.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Related reference
Adding numbered or bulleted listsNumbering and Numbering StylesAdding BulletsAdding NumberingCombining Numbered ListsAdding captionsModifying Numbering in a Numbered List
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.10.14.9. IBM Lotus Symphony
Numbering and Numbering Styles
You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style.
To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Object Bar.
Note: You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Style list.
To apply numbering with a paragraph style:
Click Layout > Style List, and then choose Paragraph Styles from Style type.1.
Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify.2.
Click the Outline & Numbering tab.3.
In the Numbering field, select a numbering style.4.
Click OK.5.
Select the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to.6.
In the Style List window, double click the paragraph style that you just modified to apply the numbering style.7.
Parent topic: Adding Numbering
Related reference
Adding numbered or bulleted listsAdding Bullets
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
85 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Adding NumberingCombining Numbered ListsAdding captionsDefining Number RangesModifying Numbering in a Numbered List
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.11. IBM Lotus Symphony
Master Documents and Subdocuments
A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master documentcan be seen as a container for individual Lotus® Symphony™ Documents files. The individual files are calledsubdocuments.
Characteristics of Master Documents
When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered areprinted.
You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments.
Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the masterdocument.
When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence overstyles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments.
Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document.
When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link iscreated in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly inthe master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit.
Example of using styles
A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In eachsubdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments aresaved.
When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document.First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but asStyle1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported.
In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in themaster document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the secondsubdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument withdifferent attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
86 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and itssubdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and itssubdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command File - New -Master Document.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Related reference
Working with Master Documents and SubdocumentsIndexes Covering Several DocumentsNavigator for Master Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.12. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting Cross-References
Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-referenceconsists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document.
Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets.
Cross-Referencing Text
Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text.
To insert a target:
Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference.1.
Choose Create - Cross-reference.2.
In the Type list, select Set Reference.3.
Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box.4.
Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection list.5.
Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section.
To create a cross-reference to a target:
Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference.1.
Choose Create - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already.2.
In the Type list, select "Insert Reference".3.
In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference.4.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
87 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type ofinformation that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and"Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted.
5.
Click Insert.6.
Click Close when finished.7.
Cross-Referencing an Object
You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables,so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Create - Caption .
Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference.1.
Choose Create - Cross-reference.2.
In the Type list, select the caption category of the object.3.
In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference.4.
In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type ofinformation that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption categoryand caption text of the object.
5.
Click Insert.6.
Click Close when finished.7.
Updating Cross-References
To manually update the cross-references in a document, press F9 (Mac special use).
Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the referencecontents.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.13. IBM Lotus Symphony
Merging fields into documents
You can send out batches of letters that merge fields from a data source. You can select a data source and merge itsfields into a new document, and then you can either print the documents or send them by e-mail.
IBM® Lotus Notes® must be installed to use the Send E-mail function. Specify the location of the Lotus Notesinstallation path in File > Preferences > Symphony > Mail Merge.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
88 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Click Tools > Mail Merge. The Mail Merge window displays.1.
Click Browse to select a file that includes a list of recipients. The file can be one of three file types:OpenDocument Spreadsheet (.ods), IBM Lotus Notes contacts (.nsf), or comma-separated values (.csv).When you select a spreadsheet that has more than one sheet, the Select Table window displays. Select thetable that you want to use for the list of recipients and then click OK.
2.
Optional: Click if you want to preview and edit the list of recipients. In the preview window, you canselect or clear any of the listed recipients.
3.
Optional: Click if you want to create a new document based on the current selection of recipients. Thisstep creates a new document in which the Mail Merge window automatically displays and the current datasource and selection of recipients is automatically applied.
4.
Optional: Click if you want to create a new envelope based on the current selection of recipients. Thisstep creates a new document in which the Mail Merge window automatically displays. The current data sourceand selection of recipients is automatically applied, and the Create Envelope window automatically displays.
5.
In the Insert Fields field, select a field that you want to insert into the document and then click Insert.6.
Optional: If there are predefined fields in the document, you can click Match Fields to match these fields tothe current list of recipients. In the Match Fields window, select fields from the data source that correspond tothe predefined fields in the document and click OK. The fields from the current data source and thepredefined fields display differently in the document. After matching a field, the original field name is replacedwith the field name from the current data source.
7.
Click Finish Merge and select from these options:
Select Preview if you want to preview each instance of the merged document. You can select or clear any ofthe listed recipients. You can also click Finish Merge on the toolbar and select Print, Save, or SendE-mail.Select Print to print the document. After setting the print options in the Print window, click OK.Select Save to save the instances of the merged document. You can save all instances as one file or saveeach instance as a separate file. After setting the save options in Save window, click OK.If you want to send a separate e-mail to recipients of this merged document, select Send E-mail. Thedocument is sent as an attachment. You can select to send the file as .pdf or .odt. Each e-mail addressonly receives the e-mail and attachment that corresponds to that entry in the data source. You can optionallyprovide e-mail address in the CC and BCC fields. Click OK.
8.
At any point of the mail merge process, you can click File > Save to save the document mail merge settings.Whenever you open a document with mail merge settings, the Mail Merge window automatically displays.
9.
Specifying the location of Lotus Notes for Mail Merge
IBM Lotus Notes must be installed to use the Send E-mail control in the Mail Merge window. You can specify thelocation of the Lotus Notes installation path in the preferences page.
Creating an envelope
You can create an envelope and edit envelope properties. Fields for the sender address and the delivery addressare automatically included when you create an envelope.
Setting envelope options
When you create a new envelope or edit an existing envelope's properties, you can set envelope options, includingthe size, position of the delivery address, and position of the sender address.
Specifying envelope print settings
When you create a new envelope or edit the envelope properties, you can specify the envelope print settingsincluding envelope orientation and printer.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
89 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.13.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Specifying the location of Lotus Notes for Mail Merge
IBM® Lotus Notes® must be installed to use the Send E-mail control in the Mail Merge window. You can specify thelocation of the Lotus Notes installation path in the preferences page.
To access the mail merge preferences, click File > Preferences > Symphony > Mail Merge.
Parent topic: Merging fields into documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.13.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating an envelope
You can create an envelope and edit envelope properties. Fields for the sender address and the delivery address areautomatically included when you create an envelope.
To create and edit an envelope, perform the following steps:
Click File > New > Envelope from the main menu. The Create Envelope window displays. You can also
create an envelope by clicking from the Mail Merge panel.
1.
On the Envelope Options tab, specify the size, position of the delivery address, and position of the senderaddress that you want for the envelope.
2.
Optional: Select Display Mail Merge panel if you want to create an envelope with the mail mergeautomatically displayed. Mail Merge allows you to create a batch of envelopes for a list of recipients.
3.
Click the Envelope Print Settings tab to specify the print settings.4.Click OK. The envelope with specified settings is created.5.Click Layout > Properties > Envelope Properties or right-click and select Envelope Properties to displaythe Envelope Properties window where you can edit the envelope properties.
6.
Note: When you create an envelope by clicking from the Mail Merge panel, a new file is created withspecified settings and mail merge is automatically enabled. The current list of recipients and current selection ofrecipients are automatically selected for the new file.
Parent topic: Merging fields into documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.13.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting envelope options
When you create a new envelope or edit an existing envelope's properties, you can set envelope options, includingthe size, position of the delivery address, and position of the sender address.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
90 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To set envelope options, perform the following steps:
To create a new envelope, click File > New > Envelope from the main menu. The Create Envelope windowdisplays where you can edit the properties of the new envelope. To edit the properties of an existing envelope,right-click the envelope and select Envelope Properties. The Envelope Properties window displays.
1.
Click the Envelope Options tab.2.
In the Size field, select the format that you want for the envelope. If you change the width or height, the formatfield automatically changes to User Defined.
3.
In the Delivery Address field, specify the amount of space between the left edge and top edge of theenvelope and the addressee field respectively.
4.
In the Sender Address field, specify the amount of space between the left edge and top edge of theenvelope and the sender field respectively.
5.
Select Display Mail Merge panel if you want to create an envelope with the mail merge automaticallydisplayed. Mail Merge allows you to create a batch of envelopes for a list of recipients.
Note: The Display Mail Merge panel check box displays only on the Create Envelope window, not on theEnvelope Properties window.
6.
Click OK.7.
Parent topic: Merging fields into documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.13.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Specifying envelope print settings
When you create a new envelope or edit the envelope properties, you can specify the envelope print settingsincluding envelope orientation and printer.
To specify envelope print settings, perform the following steps:
To create a new envelope, click File > New > Envelope. The Create Envelope window displays where youcan set the print settings of the new envelope. To edit the print settings of an existing envelope, right-click theenvelope and select Envelope Properties. The Envelope Properties window displays.
1.
Click the Envelope Print Settings tab.2.Select the envelope orientation, Print face up or Print face down.3.Determine how the envelope is fed into the printer. Click one button to specify how you want the envelope tofeed into the printer.
4.
Enter the amount that you want to shift the print area to the right in the Shift right field.5.Enter the amount that you want to shift the print area to the left in the Shift down field.6.Click Setup to select the printer for the document, and click OK.7.Click OK.8.
Parent topic: Merging fields into documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.14. IBM Lotus Symphony
Previewing a Page Before Printing
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
91 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose File - Print Preview.1.
Use the zoom icons on the Print Preview bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page.
To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click Print optionspage view icon to set the print options.
2.
Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Print Preview bar to scroll through the document.3.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Related reference
Printing Multiple Pages on One SheetDisplaying print preview in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.15. IBM Lotus Symphony
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
In Print Preview mode, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet.
Choose File - Print Preview.1.
Click the Multiple Pages icon on the Print Preview bar.2.
Set the options that you want, and click OK.3.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Related reference
Previewing a Page Before PrintingDisplaying print preview in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.16. IBM Lotus Symphony
Selecting Printer Paper Trays
You can specify different paper sources for your document.
Click File > Print.1.Click the Properties button.2.On the Paper tab page, select the paper tray that you want to use.3.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.17. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
92 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Using the searching and replacing function in documents
You can find and replace text using wildcards in a document.
Using wildcards in text searches
You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.17.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using wildcards in text searches
You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document.
Click Edit > Find and Replace.1.
Select the Regular expressions check box.2.
In the Search for field, type the search term and the one or more wildcards that you want to use in yoursearch.
The wildcard for any string of characters is an asterisk.The wildcard for a single character is a period (.).The wildcard combination for several characters in succession is .* (period and asterisk). For example, "s*n"finds "sun" and "son". You can search for regular expressions only within paragraphs.The wildcard combination for the end of a paragraph is the dollar sign ($), while the wildcard combination forthe first character at the start of a paragraph is the caret and the period ( .̂).
3.
Click Find or Find All.4.
Parent topic: Using the searching and replacing function in documents
Related reference
List of Regular ExpressionsFinding and Replacing in Lotus Symphony DocumentsNavigator for Text DocumentsSearching for AttributesRemoving Line Breaks
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.18. IBM Lotus Symphony
Docking and Resizing Windows
You can dock, undock and resize most Lotus® Symphony™ program windows such as the Navigator or the Style Listwindow.
To dock or undock the Navigator or the Style List window, hold down the Ctrl key and double-click on a gray area inthe window. Alternatively, press Ctrl+Shift+0.
To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
93 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.19. IBM Lotus Symphony
Counting Words
If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text.1.
Choose Tools - Word Count.2.
To get some more statistics about the document, choose File - File Properties - Statistics.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.20. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using Shortcut Keys (Lotus Symphony Documents Accessibility)
Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system. Keys that areassigned to the desktop system are not available to Lotus® Symphony™. Try to assigndifferent keys in your desktop system.
Press the keys Alt+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run acommand. For example, press Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then T to insert a table.
To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. The following section gives youan example of inserting a text table in the document with shortcut keys.
Inserting Text Table
Press F6 until the focus is on the toolbar.1.
Press the right arrow key until the Table icon is selected.2.
Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include inthe table.
3.
Press Enter.4.
Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document.5.
Keyboard navigation
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
94 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
You can use shortcut keys to perform common tasks in documents. You can also use the general shortcut keys forLotus Symphony.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Related reference
Keyboard navigationNavigating and selecting with the keyboardShortcuts (Lotus Symphony Accessibility)
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.20.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Keyboard navigation
You can use shortcut keys to perform common tasks in documents. You can also use the general shortcut keys forLotus® Symphony™.
Function keys for Lotus Symphony Documents
Action Shortcut
Selects next frame. Shift+F4
Enters or exits the “Addition” selection mode Shift+F8
Opens the Create Fields window. Ctrl+F2
Opens the Auto Text window. Ctrl+F3
Opens the Navigator panel, and movesfocus to the Page combo box by default.
Ctrl+Shift+F5
Enters or exits the “Block Area” selectionmode.
Ctrl+Shift+F8
Moves between a document and thesidebar.
Ctrl+Shift+9
Moves focus among active dialogs or thesidebar.
F6
Checks spelling. F7
Switches to EXT (Extension) selectionmode.
F8
Switches between Standard and Additionalselection modes.
Shift+F8
Updates fields. F9
Shows fields. Ctrl+F9
Updates input fields. Ctrl+Shift+F9
Moves to main menu. F10 (Mac special use)
Shows/hides non-printing characters. Ctrl+F10
Moves the focus to "Apply Style" field Ctrl+F11
Turns stylist on or off. F11
Opens the Create Style window. Shift+F11
Updates the style. Ctrl+Shift+F11
Numbering / Bullets on/off. Ctrl+Shift+F12
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
95 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Action Shortcut
Turns bullets on/off. Shift+F12
Moves focus among the active dialogs or thesidebar.
Shift+F6
Opens or closes Formula bar F2
Completes Auto Text F3
Opens or closes the Navigator panel F5
Enters or exits the “Extension” selectionmode
F8
Numbering on/off. F12
Using shortcut keys
Use the keyboard accelerator Alt+<Letter> to access menu commands. For example, press Alt+I to open the Insertmenu, and then press T to insert a table.
To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Esc.
Shortcut keys for Lotus Symphony Documents
Action Shortcut
Justifies the selection. Ctrl+J
Right-aligns the selection. Ctrl+R
Left-aligns the selection. Ctrl+L
Underlines the selection. Ctrl+U
Double-underlines the selection. Ctrl+Shift+D
Selection cursor on/off in read-only mode Ctrl+Shift+I
Italicizes the selection. Ctrl+I
Applies bold style to the selection. Ctrl+B
Increases the font size of the selection. Ctrl+Shift+>
Decreases the font size of the selection. Ctrl+Shift+<
Applies Heading style 1 to the selection. Ctrl+Shift+1
Applies Heading style 2 to the selection. Ctrl+Shift+2
Applies Heading style 3 to the selection. Ctrl+Shift+3
Applies Heading style 4 to the selection. Ctrl+Shift+4
Applies Heading style 5 to the selection. Ctrl+Shift+5
Applies default formatting to the selection. Ctrl+T
Opens Hyperlink dialog where you cancreate or edit a hyperlink.
Ctrl+K
Opens "Text Properties" dialog. Ctrl+D
Aligns selected text horizontally. Ctrl+E
Makes selected text superscript. Ctrl+Shift+P
Indents line. Ctrl+M
Decreases line indent. Ctrl+Shift+M
Inserts nonbreaking dash (not used forhyphenation).
Ctrl+Shift+Minus(-)(Minus on the numerickeypad)
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
96 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Action Shortcut
Creates a new document. Alt+B
Opens the Print window. Ctrl+P
Turns field shadings on or off. Ctrl+Shift+X
Closes the document. Ctrl+W
Calculates the selected texts and copies tothe clipboard
Ctrl+Plus(+)
Non-breaking dash Ctrl+Minus(-)
Applies single line spacing to the selection. Ctrl+1
Applies double line spacing to the selection. Ctrl+2
Applies single-and-a-half line spacing to theselection.
Ctrl+5
Switches bidirectional text layout to right-to-left, right aligned.
Note: Bidirectional text, for example Hebrewor Arabic language text, is normally readfrom right-to left.
Ctrl+Shift (Right)
Note: You must first enable complex textlanguage (CTL) in Lotus SymphonyPreferences. Select File > Preferences >Symphony > Language Settings >Languages, and make sure that Complextext layout(CTL) support is enabled.
Switches bidirectional text layout to left-to-right, left-aligned.
Note: Bidirectional text, for example Hebrewor Arabic language text, is normally readfrom right-to left.
Ctrl+Shift (Left)
Note: You must first enable complex textlanguage (CTL) in Lotus SymphonyPreferences. Select File > Preferences >Symphony > Language Settings >Languages, and make sure that Enabledfor complex text layout(CTL) check box isselected.
Inserts nonbreaking dash (not used forhyphenation).
Ctrl+Shift+Minus (-)
Inserts a blank line. Shift+Enter
Inserts manual page break. Ctrl+Enter
Inserts a column break in multicolumn text.You must first set the page columns to bemore than one.
Ctrl+Shift+Enter
Expands the selection to the left by acharacter.
Shift+Left Arrow
Goes to the beginning of the word. Ctrl+Left Arrow
Expands the selection to the left by a word. Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow
Expands the selection to the right by acharacter.
Shift+Right Arrow
Goes to the end of the word. Ctrl+Right Arrow
Expands the selection to the right by a word. Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Expands the selection up by one line. Shift+Up Arrow
Contracts the selection down by one line. Shift+Down Arrow
Goes to the beginning of a line. Home
Selects from the cursor to the beginning ofthe line.
Shift+Home
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
97 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Action Shortcut
Goes to the end of line. End
Selects from the cursor to the end of theline.
Shift+End
Goes to the start of the document. Ctrl+Home
Selects text from the cursor to the start ofthe document.
Ctrl+Shift+Home
Goes to the end of the document. Ctrl+End
Selects text from the cursor to the end of thedocument.
Ctrl+Shift+End
Switches the cursor between the text and theheader.
Ctrl+PageUp
Switches the cursor between the text and thefooter.
Ctrl+PageDown
Pastes last selected text to the currentcursor position.
Shift+Insert
Moves up screen page with selection. Shift+PageUp
Moves down screen page with selection. Shift+PageDown
Deletes text to the end of a word. Ctrl+Del
Deletes text to the beginning of a word. Ctrl+Backspace
Deletes one word before cursor. Alt+Backspace
Deletes text to the end of the sentence. Ctrl+Shift+Del
Deletes text to the beginning of thesentence.
Ctrl+Shift+Backspace
Switches to toolbar and tabs. Ctrl+Tab
Uses previous suggestion with automaticword completion.
Ctrl+Shift+Tab
Copies and pastes object. Ctrl+Drag
Docks or undocks the navigator, stylist orother windows.
Ctrl+Shift+F0
Hides the docked window when focused onthat window.
Ctrl+Shift+H
Repeats search. Ctrl+Shift+F
Creates a new file with new file templates. Ctrl+Shift+N
Opens the Save As window. Ctrl+Shift+S
Moves cursor to beginning of paragraph. Alt+Up Arrow
Moves cursor to end of paragraph. Alt+Down Arrow
Shortcut keys for paragraphs and heading levels
The numbering is automatically adjusted.
Description Shortcut
Moves the cursor to the beginning of theprevious paragraph.
Ctrl+Up Arrow
Moves the cursor to the beginning of thenext paragraph.
Ctrl+Down Arrow
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
98 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Description Shortcut
Moves the cursor to the beginning of theparagraph.
Alt+Up Arrow
Moves the cursor to the end of theparagraph.
Alt+Down Arrow
Moves the selected paragraphs up oneparagraph.
Ctrl+Alt+Up Arrow
Moves the selected paragraphs down oneparagraph.
Ctrl+Alt+Down Arrow
Moves the heading in format "Heading X" (X= 1-9) down one level in the outline.
Tab
Moves the heading in format "Heading X" (X= 2-10) up one level in the outline.
Shift+Tab
Shortcut keys for tables
Description Shortcut
Opens the Create Table window. Ctrl+F12
When the cursor is in an empty cell, selectsentire table. Otherwise, selects contents ofthe cell where the cursor is; pressing theshortcut again selects the entire table.
Ctrl+A
When the cursor is in an empty cell, goes tothe first cell of the table. Otherwise, goes tobeginning of the cell where the cursor islocated. Pressing the shortcut again goes tobeginning of the current table, and pressinga third time goes to the beginning of thedocument.
Ctrl+Home
When the cursor is in an empty cell, goes tothe end of the table. Otherwise, goes to endof the cell where the cursor is located.Pressing the shortcut again goes to end ofcurrent table, and pressing it a third timegoes to the end of the document.
Ctrl+End
Inserts a tab stop. Ctrl+Tab
Selects the active cell and the cell on theright.
Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow
Selects the active cell and the cell on theleft.
Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow
Decreases the size of the row on the bottomcell edge.
Alt+Up Arrow
Increases the size of the row on the bottomcell edge.
Alt+Down Arrow
Decreases the size of the column on theright cell edge.
Alt+Left Arrow
Increases the size of the column on the rightcell edge.
Alt+Right Arrow
Increases the size of the row on the top celledge.
Alt+Up Arrow
Decreases the size of the row on the top celledge.
Alt+Down Arrow
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
99 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Description Shortcut
Enters the Delete mode. In this mode, Arrowkeys delete rows or columns, Ctrl+Lef/RightArrow keys merge cells with neighboringcells.
Alt+Del
If nothing is selected, contents of next cellare deleted. If cells are selected, each rowin the selection is deleted. If all rows areselected completely or partially, the entiretable is deleted.
Shift+Ctrl+Del
Calculates table Ctrl+Plus sign("+")
Shortcut keys for moving and resizing frames, graphics, and objects
Description Shortcut
When the cursor is inside a text frame andno text is selected, selects the text frame.When the text frame is selected, clears thecursor from the text frame.
Esc
When a text frame is selected, inserts thecursor at the beginning of text in the textframe.
F2 or Enter
When cursor is inside a text frame, thecharacter is added at the cursor.
Any key that produces a character on thescreen
Moves object. Alt+Arrow keys
Parent topic: Using Shortcut Keys (Lotus Symphony Documents Accessibility)
Related reference
Navigating and selecting with the keyboardUsing Shortcut Keys (Lotus Symphony Documents Accessibility)Shortcuts (Lotus Symphony Accessibility)
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.21. IBM Lotus Symphony
Calculating with documents
You can perform calculations in documents.
Calculating Across Tables
Using calculations in documents
You can insert a calculation result directly into a document.
Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document
Calculating the sum of a series of table cells
Using calculations in tables
You can add the values in the cells of a table to display the sum in a separate cell of the same table or display theresult in a different table.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
100 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.21.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Calculating Across Tables
You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document.
Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables.1.
Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables.2.
Press F2.3.
In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, "=SUM".4.
Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing anumber.
5.
Press Enter.6.
Parent topic: Calculating with documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.21.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using calculations in documents
You can insert a calculation result directly into a document.
Click the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2.1.
Use the calculation that you want.
You can insert your own calculation. To the right of the = sign, type the calculation that you want to insert, forexample, 10000/12.You can use the formula icon to select a predefined function. For example, to calculate the mean value of
three numbers, first click and hold the Formula icon , and then select Statistical Functions > Mean.Type the first number, followed by a vertical slash |, and repeat for the second and third numbers.
2.
Press Enter.3.
Parent topic: Calculating with documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.21.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document
If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", Lotus® Symphony™ can calculate, and then paste the
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
101 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar.
Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces.1.
Choose Table - Calculate, or press Ctrl+Plus Sign (+).2.
Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose Edit - Paste, or pressCtrl+V.
3.
If the formula is selected, it is replaced by the result.
Parent topic: Calculating with documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.21.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Calculating the sum of a series of table cells
Choose Table - Create Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document.1.
Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty.2.
Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the toolbar. The Formula Barappears with the entry "=sum".
3.
Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release. Lotus®Symphony™ inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column.
4.
Press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar. The sum of the values in the current column is entered in thecell.
5.
If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last columncell.
Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers.
Parent topic: Calculating with documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.21.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using calculations in tables
You can add the values in the cells of a table to display the sum in a separate cell of the same table or display theresult in a different table.
Insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and enter numbers into some of the cells of the larger table.1.Select the cell where you want the result to display, and then press F2. You can select a cell in the same tableor in a separate table.
2.
In the Formula Bar, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, SUM.3.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
102 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Click a cell in the table that contains a number, press the plus sign(+), and then click a different cell containinga number.
4.
Press Enter to calculate the sum of the numbers selected from the table.5.
Parent topic: Calculating with documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22. IBM Lotus Symphony
Menus and toolbars in Documents
This section provides a general overview of menus and toolbars in Lotus® Symphony™ Documents.
Menus in Documents
Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in Lotus Symphony Documents.This overview describesthe default toolbar configuration for Lotus Symphony.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Menus in Documents
The following section lists the help topics available for menus and dialogs.
The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to usethe menu commands. Similarly, you must select an object in the document to use themenu commands associated with the object.
The menus are context sensitive. This means that those menu items are available that arerelevant to the work currently being carried out. If the cursor is located in a text, then all ofthose menu items are available that are needed to edit the text. If you have selectedgraphics in a document, then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to editgraphics.
File menu in Documents
Using the Edit menu in documents
Controlling the on-screen display
Create menu in Documents
Formatting the layout of documents
Tools in Documents
Window menu in Documents
Parent topic: Menus and toolbars in Documents
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
103 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
File menu in Documents
These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application.
New
Creates a new Lotus® Symphony™.
Open
Opens or imports a file.
Recent Files
Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
Close
Closes the current document without exiting the program.
Save
Saves the current document.
Save As
Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
Versions
Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, andcompare previous versions.
Export
Export as PDF
A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact, provided that supportingsoftware is installed.
Digital Signatures
Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
104 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
File Properties
Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
Template Organizer
Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
Print Preview
Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the currentdocument.
Exit
Closes all Lotus Symphony.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using the Edit menu in documents
This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document.
Undo
Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click thearrow next to the Undo icon on the toolbar.
Paste Special
Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
Selection Mode
Choose the selection mode from the submenu: Standard, Extension, Addition, and Block Area.
Find and Replace
Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
Fields
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
105 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Right click in front of a field, and then choose thiscommand. In the dialog, you can use the arrow buttons to move to the previous or the next field.
Footnote and Endnote
Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose thiscommand.
Index Entry
Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
Hyperlink
Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
Links
Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This commandis not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
Image Map
Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is agroup of one or more hotspots.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Controlling the on-screen display
This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document.
Normal
Displays how the document will look when you print it.
Zoom
Reduces or enlarges the screen display of Lotus® Symphony™.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
106 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Create menu in Documents
The Create menu contains commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes sections,footnotes, comments, special characters, graphics, and objects from other applications.
Break
Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position.
Fields
Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The submenu lists the most common field types. To view all of theavailable fields, choose Other.
Special Characters
Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
Formatting Mark
Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks.
Section
Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose thiscommand to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply customcolumn layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met.
Hyperlink
Opens a dialog that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
Header
Adds or removes a header from the page style that you select in the submenu. The header is added to all of thepages that use the same page style. In a new document, only the "Default" page style is listed. Other page styles areadded to the list after you apply them in the document.
Footer
Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pagesthat use the same page style. In a new document, only the "Default" page style is listed. Other page styles are addedto the list after you apply them in the document.
Footnote and Endnote
Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
107 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Caption
Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object. You can also access thiscommand by right-clicking the item that you want to add the caption to.
Document Bookmark
Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at alater time.
Cross-reference
This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referencedfields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
Comment
Inserts a comment anchored to the current cursor position.
References
Opens a menu to insert index entries and to insert indexes and tables.
Frame
Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
Object
Inserts an object into your document.
Video or Sound
Inserts a video or sound file into your document. You can choose to insert a video or sound file as a link or an OLEobject.
File
Inserts a text file at the current cursor position.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Formatting the layout of documents
Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
108 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Default Formatting
Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
Bullets and Numbering
Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
Change Case
Changes the case of the selected characters, or if the cursor is in a word, changes the case of all of the characters inthe word.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
Sections
Changes the properties of sections defined in your document. To insert a section, select text or click in yourdocument, and then choose Create - Section.
Style List
Use the Style List window to apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply thestyle.
Anchor
Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
Wrap
Sets the text wrap options for graphics, objects, and frames.
Align
Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
Arrange
Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
Flip
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
109 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
Group
Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
Object Name
Opens a submenu to edit the name of the selected object.
Object Description
Opens a submenu to edit the description of the selected object.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Tools in Documents
Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuringmenus, and setting program preferences.
Spell Check
Line Numbers
Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document. To exclude a paragraph from line numbering,click in the paragraph, choose Layout > Properties > Paragraph Properties , click the Outline & Numbering tab,and then clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box.
Mail Merge
Starts the Mail Merge to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
Update
Updates items in the current document that have dynamic contents, so as fields and indexes.
Macro
Lets you record or organize and edit macros.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.1.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
110 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Window menu in Documents
Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows.
Parent topic: Menus in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in Lotus® Symphony™ Documents.This overviewdescribes the default toolbar configuration for Lotus Symphony.
You can also customize the toolbar preferences by using either of the following ways:
Click File > Preferences > Symphony > Toolbar and change the selections as you want.Right-click the blank area of the tool bar in the window and click Toolbar Preferences.
Context Sensitive bar in Documents
The Context Sensitive bar consists of Graphic Object bar, Form Object bar, and other bars that are contextsensitive. Which bar and what commands are available depends on what object is selected.
Opening the drawing bar in Documents
Choose View - Toolbar - Drawing to open the Drawing bar, where you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to thecurrent document.
Editing bar
The Editing bar contains Undo, Copy, Spell Check, Create Graphic, and other common commands.
File bar in Documents
The File bar is available in every Lotus Symphony application. It contains commands to create, save, and print files.
Forms bar
The Forms toolbar contains the tools that you need to create an interactive form. You can use the toolbar to addcontrols to a form in a text document, spreadsheet, and presentation.
Parent topic: Menus and toolbars in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Context Sensitive bar in Documents
The Context Sensitive bar consists of Graphic Object bar, Form Object bar, and other bars that are context sensitive.Which bar and what commands are available depends on what object is selected.
Text Object bar in Documents
The Text Object bar in text input mode contains several text formatting functions.
Numbering Object bar
The Numbering Object bar contains functions to modify the structure of numbered paragraphs, including changingthe order of paragraphs and defining different paragraph levels.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
111 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Graphic Object bar in Documents
The Graphic Object bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected graphics.
Table Object bar in Documents
The Table Object bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursorinto a table.
OLE Object bar in Documents
The OLE Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formattingand positioning objects.
Drawing object bar in Documents
The Drawing Object bar that appears when a drawing object is selected contains functions for editing drawings andpositioning options.
Form Object bar in Documents
The Form Object bar becomes visible as soon as you select a form object when working in the design mode.
Print preview bar in Documents
The Print Preview bar appears when you view the current document in the page preview mode.
Parent topic: Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Text Object bar in Documents
The Text Object bar in text input mode contains several text formatting functions.
Table 1. Icons on the Text Object bar
Function
name
Icon Description
Apply Style Allows you to assign a style to the currentparagraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selectedobject. Further styles can be found in Layout -Stylist.
Font Allows you to select a font name from the list orenter a font name directly.
Font Size Allows you to choose between different font sizesfrom the list, or to enter a size manually.
Bold Makes the selected text bold.
Italic Makes the selected text italic.
Underline Underlines or removes underlining from theselected text.
Align Left Aligns the one or more selected paragraphs tothe left page margin.
Align Center Centers the one or more selected paragraphs onthe page.
Align Right Aligns the one or more selected paragraphs tothe right page margin.
Justified Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left andthe right page margins.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
112 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
name
Icon Description
Bullets Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs,or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
Numbering Adds or removes numbering from the selectedparagraphs.
Line Spacing Specifies the amount of space to leave betweenlines of text in a paragraph. (Contains drop-downitems)
IndentIn IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents,increases the left indent of the current paragraphand sets it to the next tab stop.
InLotus Symphony Spreadsheets, click theIncrease Indent icon to increase the indentationof the cell content of the selected cells.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations, movesthe selected paragraph Down One Level in anumbering or bullets hierarchy.
DecreaseIndent In Lotus Symphony Documents, click the
Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent ofthe current paragraph and set it to the previoustab position.
In Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets, click theDecrease Indent icon to reduce the indentation ofthe cell content in the selected cells.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations, movesthe selected paragraph Up One Level in thenumbering or bullets hierarchy.
Superscript Reduces the font size of the selected text andraises the text above the baseline.
Subscript Reduces the font size of the selected text andlowers the text below the baseline.
Left-To-Right Sets the text to run from left to right.
Right-To-Left Right to left icon Sets the text to run from right to left.
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Numbering Object bar
The Numbering Object bar contains functions to modify the structure of numbered paragraphs, including changing theorder of paragraphs and defining different paragraph levels.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
113 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Icons on the Numbering Object bar
Function name Icon Description
Apply Style Allows you to assign a style to the currentparagraph, selected paragraphs, or to aselected object. Further styles can be found inLayout - Stylist.
Font Name Allows you to select a font name from the listor enter a font name directly.
Font Size Allows you to choose between different fontsizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
Bold Makes the selected text bold.
Italic Makes the selected text italic.
Underline Underlines or removes underlining from theselected text.
Align Left Aligns the one or more selected paragraphs tothe left page margin.
Align Center Centers the one or more selected paragraphson the page.
Align Right Aligns the one or more selected paragraphs tothe right page margin.
Justified Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the leftand the right page margins.
Bullets Assigns bullet points to the selectedparagraphs, or removes them from bulletedparagraphs.
Numbering Adds or removes numbering from theselected paragraphs.
IndentIn IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents,increases the left indent of the currentparagraph and sets it to the next tab stop.
InLotus Symphony Spreadsheets, click theIncrease Indent icon to increase theindentation of the cell content of the selectedcells.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations, movesthe selected paragraph Down One Level in anumbering or bullets hierarchy.
Decrease IndentIn Lotus Symphony Documents, click theDecrease Indent icon to reduce the left indentof the current paragraph and set it to theprevious tab position.
In Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets, click theDecrease Indent icon to reduce theindentation of the cell content in the selectedcells.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations, movesthe selected paragraph Up One Level in the
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
114 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
numbering or bullets hierarchy.
Line Spacing Specifies the amount of space to leavebetween lines of text in a paragraph. (Containsdrop-down items)
Indent withSubpoint
Shifts paragraphs with subpoints down onelevel.
Decrease Indentwith Subpoint
Shifts paragraphs with subpoints up onenumbering level.
Move Up Moves the selected paragraph up one level inthe numbering or bullets hierarchy.
Move Down Moves the selected paragraph down one levelin a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
Superscript Reduces the font size of the selected text andraises the text above the baseline.
Subscript Reduces the font size of the selected text andlowers the text below the baseline.
InsertUnnumberedEntry
Inserts a paragraph without numbering.
RestartNumbering
Restarts the text numbering.
Left-To-Right Sets the text to run from left to right.
Right-To-Left Right to left icon Sets the text to run from right to left.
Function name Icon Description
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Graphic Object bar in Documents
The Graphic Object bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected graphics.
Table 1. Icons on the Graphic Object bar
Function
name
Icon Description
Apply Style Allows you to assign a style to the selected graphicobject. Further styles can be found in Layout - Stylist.
Anchor Allows you to switch between anchoring options.(Contains drop-down items)
Flip Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.(contains drop-down items)
Arrange Changes the stacking order of the one or moreselected objects. (Contains drop-down items)
Align(Horizontal)
Modifies the horizontal alignment of selected objects.(Contains drop-down items)
Align(Vertical)
Align (Vertical)icon
Modifies the vertical alignment of selected objects.(Contains drop-down items)
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
115 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
name
Icon Description
Wrap Specify the way you want text to wrap around anobject. You can also specify the spacing between thetext and the object. (Contains drop-down items)
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Table Object bar in Documents
The Table Object bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor intoa table.
Table 1. Icons on the Table Object bar
Function
name
Icon Description
Apply Style Allows you to assign a style to the currentparagraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selectedobject. Further styles can be found in Layout -Stylist.
Font Name Allows you to select a font name from the list orenter a font name directly.
Font Size Allows you to choose between different font sizesfrom the list, or to enter a size manually.
Bold Makes the selected text bold.
Italic Makes the selected text italic.
Underline Underlines or removes underlining from theselected text.
Align Left Aligns the one or more selected paragraphs tothe left page margin.
Align Center Centers the one or more selected paragraphs onthe page.
Align Right Aligns the one or more selected paragraphs tothe right page margin.
Justified Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left andthe right page margins.
Align Top Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edgeof the cell.
AlignVerticallyCenter
Vertically centers the contents of the cell.
Align Bottom Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edgeof the cell.
Bullets Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs,or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
116 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
name
Icon Description
Numbering Adds or removes numbering from the selectedparagraphs.
IndentIn IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents,increases the left indent of the current paragraphand sets it to the next tab stop.
InLotus Symphony Spreadsheets, click theIncrease Indent icon to increase the indentationof the cell content of the selected cells.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations, movesthe selected paragraph Down One Level in anumbering or bullets hierarchy.
DecreaseIndent In Lotus Symphony Documents, click the
Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent ofthe current paragraph and set it to the previoustab position.
In Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets, click theDecrease Indent icon to reduce the indentation ofthe cell content in the selected cells.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Presentations, movesthe selected paragraph Up One Level in thenumbering or bullets hierarchy.
Line Spacing Specifies the amount of space to leave betweenlines of text in a paragraph. (Contains drop-downitems)
Superscript Reduces the font size of the selected text andraises the text above the baseline.
Subscript Reduces the font size of the selected text andlowers the text below the baseline.
Select Table Clicks this icon to select the entire table quickly,when the cursor is in any cell of the table.
Create Row Inserts a row in the table, below the cursorposition. You can insert more than one row byopening the corresponding dialog (choose Table- Insert - Rows ), or by selecting more than onerow before clicking the icon. The second methodinserts rows of the same height as the originallyselected rows.
CreateColumn
Inserts one column into the table, after the cursorposition. You can insert several columns at thesame time by opening the dialog (choose Table -Insert - Columns ), or by selecting severalcolumns before clicking the icon. If the lattermethod is used, the columns inserted will havethe same relative width as the selected columns.
Merge Cells Combines the contents of the selected table cellsinto a single cell.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
117 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
name
Icon Description
Split Cells Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally orvertically into the number of cells that you enter.
Delete Rows Deletes the one or more selected rows from thetable.
DeleteColumns
Deletes the one or more selected columns fromthe table.
Sum Activates the sum function.
Left-To-Right Sets the text to run from left to right.
Right-To-Left Right to left Sets the text to run from right to left.
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
OLE Object bar in Documents
The OLE Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formatting andpositioning objects.
Table 1. Icons on the OLE Object bar
Function
name
Icon Description
Apply Style Allows you to assign a style to the selected graphicobject. Further styles can be found in Layout - Stylist.
Anchor Allows you to switch between anchoring options.(Contains drop-down items)
Arrange Changes the stacking order of the one or moreselected objects. (Contains drop-down items)
Align(Horizontal)
Modifies the horizontal alignment of selected objects.(Contains drop-down items)
Align(Vertical)
Align (Vertical)icon
Modifies the vertical alignment of selected objects.(Contains drop-down items)
Wrap Specify the way you want text to wrap around anobject. You can also specify the spacing between thetext and the object. (Contains drop-down items)
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Drawing object bar in Documents
The Drawing Object bar that appears when a drawing object is selected contains functions for editing drawings andpositioning options.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
118 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
name
icon Description
Rotate Rotates the selected object.
Arrange Changes the stacking order of the one or more selected objects.(Contains drop-down items)
Anchor Allows you to switch between anchoring options. (Containsdrop-down items)
Wrap Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You canalso specify the spacing between the text and the object.(Contains drop-down items)
Align Modifies the alignment of selected objects. (Contains drop-downitems)
Group Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as asingle object.
Ungroup Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
Display Grid Specifies whether to display the grid.
Snap to Grid Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points.
Guide whenMoving
Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Form Object bar in Documents
The Form Object bar becomes visible as soon as you select a form object when working in the design mode.
Function name icon Description
Select Allows you to select objects in the current document.
Arrange Changes the stacking order of the one or more selectedobjects. (Contains drop-down items)
Anchor
(For text documentsand spreadsheets.)
Allows you to switch between anchoring options.(Contains drop-down items)
Wrap
(Only for textdocuments.)
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.You can also specify the spacing between the text andthe object. (Contains drop-down items)
Align Modifies the alignment of selected objects. (Containsdrop-down items)
Group Groups the selected objects, so that they can be movedas a single object.
Ungroup Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
119 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function name icon Description
Enter Group Opens the selected group, so that you can edit theindividual objects.
Exit Group Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit theindividual objects in the group.
Control Properties Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selectedcontrol.
Form Properties In this dialog you can specify, among others, the datasource and the events for the whole form.
Form Navigator The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms ofthe current document with their respective controls.
Activation Order In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in whichcontrol fields get the focus when the user presses the tabkey.
Automatic ControlFocus
If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first formcontrol will be selected when you open the document. Ifthe button is not activated, the text will be selected afteropening.
Open in Design Mode Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can beedited.
Display Grid
(Only for textdocuments.)
Specifies whether to display the grid.
Snap to Grid
(For text documentsand spreadsheets.)
Specifies that you can move objects only between gridpoints.
Guide when Moving
(For text documentsand spreadsheets.)
Specifies whether to display guides when moving anobject.
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.1.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
Print preview bar in Documents
The Print Preview bar appears when you view the current document in the page preview mode.
Function
name
icon Description
First Page Moves to the first page of the document.
PreviousPage
Moves back to the previous page in the document.
Next Page Moves forward to the next page in the document.
Last Page Moves to the last page of the document.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
120 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
name
icon Description
MultiplePages
Defines the number of pages displayed on screen.
Zoom In Zooms in to get a close-up view of the document.
Zoom Specifies the display percentage of the page preview.
Zoom Out Zooms out to see more of the document at a reducedsize.
Print Opens the print dialog to print the page preview.
Close Closes the current page preview window by clickingthe Close Preview button.
Parent topic: Context Sensitive bar in Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Opening the drawing bar in Documents
Choose View - Toolbar - Drawing to open the Drawing bar, where you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to thecurrent document.
Function
Name Icon Description
Select Selects objects in the current document
Rectangle Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. To drawa square, hold down Shift while you drag. Click where you want toplace a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want.
Ellipse Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click whereyou want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw acircle, hold down Shift while you drag.
Lines The Single Line icon on the Drawing bar opens the Lines toolbar,where you can add lines and shapes to the current documents orslides. (contains drop-down items)
Shapes Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which contains basic shapes to beinserted into your document. (contains drop-down items)
Flow Charts Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics intoyour document. (contains drop-down items)
Callouts Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics intoyour document. (contains drop-down items)
Stars andSymbols
Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insertgraphics into your document. (contains drop-down items)
Text Box The Text Box toolbar contains some icons to enter different typesof text boxes. (contains drop-down items)
Fontwork The Fontwork icon on the Text Box toolbar opens the FontworkGallery from which you can insert graphical text art into yourdocument.
ExtrusionOn/Off
The Extrusion icon on the Text Box toolbar switches the 3D effectson and off for the selected objects.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
121 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Parent topic: Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
Related reference
Rotating text in DocumentsEmphasizing text
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
Editing bar
The Editing bar contains Undo, Copy, Spell Check, Create Graphic, and other common commands.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
122 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Icons on the Editing bar
Function
Name Icon Description
Undo Reverse the last action or the last entry typed.
Redo Reverse the action of the last Undo command.
Cut Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
Copy Copy the selection to the clipboard.
PasteInserts the contents of the clipboard at the locationof the cursor, and replaces any selected text orobjects. Long-click to select the format.
DuplicateFormatting
Applies same formatting on other texts or objects asthe one selected.
Create Table Inserts a table into the document.
Create Chart Inserts a chart into the document.
Create Graphic Inserts a graphic into the document.
Hyperlink Inserts a hyperlink into the document.
NonprintingCharacters
Displays nonprinting characters in text, such asparagraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, andspaces.
ZoomReduces or enlarges the screen display of thecurrent document. The current zoom factor isdisplayed in the status bar.
Spell CheckChecks the current document, or selection forspelling errors.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
123 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Function
Name Icon Description
Parent topic: Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
File bar in Documents
The File bar is available in every Lotus® Symphony™ application. It contains commands to create, save, and printfiles.
Table 1. Icons on the File bar
Function Name Icon Description
NewCreates a new document, including text document,spreadsheet and presentation. (Contains drop-down items)
Open Opens or imports a file.
Save Save the current document.
Print Print the active document with the current default printsettings.
Print Preview Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
Export as PDF Saves the current file to PDF.
Parent topic: Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.22.2.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Forms bar
The Forms toolbar contains the tools that you need to create an interactive form. You can use the toolbar to addcontrols to a form in a text document, spreadsheet, and presentation.
To access this command...
Choose View - Toolbar - Forms
To add a control to a document
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
124 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
On the Forms toolbar, click the icon of the control that you want to add.1.
In the document, drag to create the control.
To create a square control field, hold down the Shift key while you drag.
2.
To add a field from the field list of a table or query to a form, drag a cell into the form. In a textdocument, you can also drag a column header to add a field to a form. To include a label forthe field, hold down the Ctrl+Shift key down when you drag a column head.
Modifying a Control
Right-click the control and choose Control. A dialog opens where you can define the properties of the control.1.
To specify a accelerator key for a control, add a tilde (~) in front of the character in the label for the control.2.
You can drag and drop controls from one document to another document. You can also copy and pastecontrols between documents. When you insert a control from another document, Lotus® Symphony™analyzes the data source, content type, and content properties of the control so that the control fits the logicalstructure in the target document. For example, a control that displays contents from an address bookcontinues to display the same contents after you copy the control to a different document. You can view theseproperties on the Data tab page of the Form properties dialog.
3.
Design Mode On/Off
Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activateto edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
Design Mode on/off
Push Button
Creates a push button. This function can be used to execute a command for a defined event,such as a mouse click.
You can apply text and graphics to these buttons.
Label Field
Creates a field for displaying text. These labels are only for displaying predefined text.Entries cannot be made in these fields.
Text Box
Creates a text box. Text boxes are fields in which the user can enter text. In a form, textboxes display data or allow for new data input.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
125 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
List Box
Creates a list box. A list box lets users select an entry from a list.
Combo Box
Creates a combo box. A combo box is a single-line list box with a drop-down list from whichusers choose an option. You can assign the "read-only" property to the combo box so thatusers cannot enter other entries than those found in the list.
Group Box
Adds a frame that you can use to visually group similar controls, such as option buttons.
Option Button
Creates an option button. Option buttons enable the user to choose one of several options.Option buttons with the same functionality are given the same name.
Check Box
Creates a check box. Check boxes allow you to activate or deactivate a function in a form.
Spin Button
Creates a spin button.
If you add a spin button to a Lotus Symphony spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way linkbetween the spin button and a cell. As a result, when you change the contents of a cell, the contents of the spin buttonare updated. Conversely, if you change the value of the spin button, the contents of the cell are updated.
Scrollbar
Creates a scrollbar.
You can specify the following properties for a scrollbar:
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
126 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Scrollbar properties
UI name Semantics
Scroll valuemin
Specifies the minimum height or the minimum width of a scrollbar.
Scroll valuemax
Specifies the maximum height or the maximum width of a scrollbar.
Default scrollvalue
Specifies the default value of a scrollbar, used when the form is reset.
Orientation Specifies the orientation of a scrollbar, that is, horizontal or vertical.
Small change Specifies the minimum amount by which you can scroll a scrollbar, forexample, by clicking an arrow.
Largechange
Specifies the amount that a large step scrolls a scrollbar, for example, whenyou click between the scrollbar thumb and a scrollbar arrow.
Delay Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. Forexample, the delay that occurs when you click an arrow button on thescrollbar and hold down the mouse button.
Symbol color Specifies the color of the arrows on the scrollbar.
Visible SizeSpecifies the size of the scrollbar thumb in "value units". For example, avalue of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min.") / 2 results in ascrollbar thumb that occupies half of the scrollbar.
To make the width of the scrollbar equal to the height of the scrollbar, setthe Visible Size to zero.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
127 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
UI name Semantics
In a Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between ascrollbar and a cell.
Image Button
Creates a button displayed as an image. Aside from the graphic representation, an imagebutton has the same properties as a "normal" button.
Image Control
Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database. In the formdocument, double-click one of these controls to open the Insert Graphic dialog to insert theimage. There is also a context menu (not in design mode) with commands for inserting anddeleting the image.
Images from a database can be displayed in a form, and new images can be inserted in thedatabase as long as the image control is not write-protected. The control must refer to adatabase field of the image type. Therefore, enter the data field into the properties window onthe Data tab page.
File Selection
Creates a button that enables file selection.
Navigation Bar
Creates a navigation bar. The navigation bar allows you to move through the records of adatabase or a database form.
Date Field
Adds a date field.
Time Field
Adds a time field.
Numeric Field
Adds a numeric field.
Pattern Field
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
128 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Adds a masked field. A masked field consists of an input mask and a literal mask. The inputmask determines which user data can be entered. The literal mask determines the state ofthe masked field when the form is loaded.
Formatted Field
Creates a formatted field. A formatted field is a text box in which you can define how theinputs and outputs are formatted, and which limiting values apply.
A formatted field has special control properties (choose Format - Control).
Currency Field
Adds a currency field.
Parent topic: Toolbar in Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.23. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating a nested table
You can create a nested table in IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents.
Position the cursor in a table cell.1.Click Table > Create Table.2.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.24. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting bullets and numbering in multiple table cells
You can set the bullets and numbering style in multiple table cells at one time.
Select the table cells that you want to add a list to.1.Click Layout > Bullets and numbering.2.Choose a numbering style.3.
Parent topic: IBM Lotus Symphony Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25. IBM Lotus Symphony
Documents: Reference
This section provides reference topics for using IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
129 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.1. IBM Lotus Symphony
Attributes
The following functions only exist in word processing editor:
Choose the general text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, onlythe instances of text that do not use the default font style are found. If you want to find a specific font, click the Formatbutton.
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Find and Replace - Attributes button in the More Options area
After you select the attributes that you want to search for, the Search for Styles box in the Options area of the Findand Replace dialog changes to Including Styles.
If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the IncludingStyles box.
The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Search for box.
Options
Select the attributes that you want to search for.
Keep with Next Paragraph
Finds the Keep With Next Paragraph attribute.
Do not Split Paragraph
Finds the Do not split paragraph attribute.
Spacing
Finds the Spacing (top, bottom) attribute.
Alignment
Finds the Alignment (left, right, centered, justified) attribute.
Effects
Finds characters that use the Capital, Lowercase, Small capitals, and Title character attributes.
Blinking
Finds characters use the Blinking attribute.
Strikethrough
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
130 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Finds characters that use the Strikethrough (single or double) attribute.
Indent
Finds the Indent (from left, from right, first line) attribute.
Widows
Finds the Widow Control attribute.
Kerning
Finds Spacing (standard, expanded, condensed) attributes and Pair Kerning .
Outline
Finds the Outline attribute.
Position
Finds characters using the Normal, Superscript or Subscript attributes.
Register-true
Finds the Register-true attribute.
Relief
Finds the Relief attribute.
Rotation
Finds the Rotation attribute.
Shadowed
Finds the Shadowed attribute.
Font
Finds any instance where the default font was changed.
Font Color
Finds any instance where the default font color was changed.
Font Size
Finds the Font size/Font height attribute.
Font Weight
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
131 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Finds the Bold or the Bold and Italic attribute.
Font Posture
Finds the Italic or the Bold and Italic attribute.
Orphans
Finds the Orphan Control attribute.
Page Style
Finds the Break With Page Style attribute.
Scale
Finds the Scale attribute.
Language
Finds the Language attribute (for spelling).
Tab Stops
Finds paragraphs that use an additional tab set.
Underline
Finds characters that use the Underlined attribute (single, double, or dotted).
Vertical text alignment
Finds the Vertical text alignment attribute.
Individual Words
Finds individual words that use the underlined or the strikethrough attribute.
Character background
Finds characters that use the Background attribute.
Line Spacing
Finds the Line spacing (single line, 1.5 lines, double, proportional, at least, lead) attribute.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.2. IBM Lotus Symphony
Text Format (Search)
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
132 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
The following functions only exist in word processing editor:
Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Find and Replace - Format button
The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Search for box.
You do not need to specify a search text in the Search for box when you search andreplace formatting.
To define a replacement format, click in the Replace with box, and then click the Format button.
Use the Text Format (Search) or the Text Format (Replace) to define your formatting search criteria. These dialogscontain the following tab pages:
Text Flow
Specify pagination options.
Background
Choose a background color or graphic object here.
Asian Language Support
These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in File - Preferences -Symphony - Language Settings - Languages .
Position
Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
Asian Layout
Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose thiscommand.
Asian Typography
Set the typographic options for paragraphs or cells in Asian language files or To enable Asian language support,choose File - Preferences - Symphony - Language Settings - Languages , and then select the Enabled box in theAsian language support area.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.3. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
133 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Setting automatic word completion options
IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you latertype the first three letters of a collected word, Lotus Symphony Documents automatically completes the word. If youwant, you can also save the current list of tracked words, so that it can be used in the next session.
In Lotus Symphony Documents, days of the week and months are permanently stored in the instant correct memory.When the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected.
To access the word completion options, click Tools > Instant Corrections, and then click Word Completion.
To accept an automatic word completion, press Enter, otherwise continue to type.
If there is more than one word in the Instant Correct memory that matches the three letters that you type, pressAlt+Insert to cycle through the available words. A new completion will appear immediately for as long as words areavailable. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Ctrl+Shift+Tab.
Enable word completion
Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the firstthree letters of a stored word.
Append space
If you do not add punctuation after the word, a space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word.
Show as tip
Displays the completed word as a hover-help tip.
Collect words
Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the list, select the word, and then click DeleteEntry.
When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents
Saves the current word completion list, so that you can use it again when you start a new session.
Accept with
You can select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
Min. word length
Enter the minimum number of letters in the words that you want to track and complete. You cannot enter a valueless than 5.
Max. entries
Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the word completion list.
Delete Entry
Removes the selected word from the word completion list.
Related reference
Using AutoTextAuto TextFine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text DocumentsWord Completion for Text Documents
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.4. IBM Lotus Symphony
Line Style
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
134 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
This border can be the border of a frame, graphic or table. The Line Style icon is visible on the properties sidebar if agraphic, table, chart object or frame has been selected.
For more information, see the Borders section of the Help.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.5. IBM Lotus Symphony
Caption Dialog
In IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents the caption dialog contains the following boxes. To open this dialog, clickCreate - Caption...
Category
Specifies the category of the selected object.
Numbering
Specifies the type of numbering required.
Caption
Type the text of the caption into the Caption field.
Position
Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
Options
Adds the chapter number to the caption label.
Level
Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
Separator
Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
Note: In IBM Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets and Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets the caption dialog only containsCaption and Position box.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
135 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.6. IBM Lotus Symphony
Working with Graphics
Topics in this folder show how to work with graphics in IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.7. IBM Lotus Symphony
Main Toolbar
The Main Toolbar is located at the left edge of the program window. This dockable toolbar contains frequently usedediting tools.
Create Table
Inserts a table into the document. If the cursor is in a table, the Table Properties dialog opens.
Create Table
Create
Activates the tool currently displayed on the icon.
Create
Cut
Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
Cut
Copy
Copies the selection to the clipboard.
Copy
Paste
Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.Long-click to select the format.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
136 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Paste
Spellcheck
Checks the current document, or selection for spelling errors. IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ include headers, footers,index entries, and footnotes in the spellcheck. The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to theend of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of thedocument.
Spellcheck
Nonprinting Characters
Shows nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
Undo
Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To change the number of commands that you can undo,choose File - Preferences - Lotus Symphony - Memory , and enter a new value in the number of steps box.
You can cancel the Undo command by choosing Edit - Redo .
Undo
Redo
Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse.
Redo
Zoom
Reduces or enlarges the screen display of the current document.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.8. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony Documents Toolbar Set 2
The toolbar is located at the top edge of the program window. Use the icons on this toolbar to access most commonprogram commands.
Create
You can create table, chart, and graphics by clicking respective create icons on the toolbar.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
137 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Create
Nonprint Characters
Shows nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
To access this command
Choose View - Nonprinting Characters
Ctrl+M
Nonprinting Characters
Duplicate Formatting
Duplicates selected format to a file or part of a file.
To access this command
Choose Edit - Duplicate Formatting
Duplicate Formatting
Zoom
Reduces or enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed in the statusbar.
To access this command
Choose View - Zoom
Double click the field on the Status Bar
Zoom
Zooming is handled differently on Unix, Linux, and Windows platforms. A documentsaved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor onUnix/Linux platforms.
Spellcheck
Checks the current document, or selection for spelling errors. IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ includes headers, footers,index entries, and footnotes in the spellcheck. The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to theend of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of thedocument.
To access this command...
The Spell Check dialog only appears when the spellcheck finds a mistake:
Choose Tools - Spellcheck
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
138 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
F7 key
Spellcheck looks for misspelled words and gives you the option of adding an unknown word to a user dictionary.When the first misspelled word is found, the Spell Check dialog opens.
Spellcheck
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.9. IBM Lotus Symphony
Using the navigator toolbar in Documents
You can use the navigator toolbar to quickly jump to different parts of your document, insert elements from the currentdocument, or other open documents.
To open the toolbar, click View > Navigator or press Ctrl+Shift+F5.1.
Do one of the following tasks.
To edit an item in the toolbar, right-click the item, and then choose a command from the context menu. If youwant, you can dock the Navigator at the edge of your workspace.To move the toolbar, drag its title bar.To dock the toolbar, press Ctrl and drag its title bar to the left or to the right edge of the workspace.To view the items in the category, click the plus sign(+) next to a category in the navigator.To jump to an item in the document, double-click the item in the navigator.
Note: A hidden section in a document is disabled in the toolbar, and displays the text hidden when you point toit.
2.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.10. IBM Lotus Symphony
Editing the properties of a field in documents
Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command.
In the dialog, you can use the arrow buttons to move to the previous or the next field.
You can also double-click a field in your document to open the field for editing.
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Fields
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
139 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To change the view between field names and field contents in your document, choose View -Fields.
If you select a DDE link in your document, and then choose Edit - Fields, the Edit Linksdialog opens.
If you click in front of a "sender" type field, and then choose Edit - Fields, the User datadialog opens.
Type
Lists the type of field that you are editing.
The following dialog elements are only visible when the corresponding field type isselected.
Select
Lists the field options, for example, "fixed". If you want, you can click another option for the selected field type.
Format
Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additionalformats" in the list, and then choose a different format. The formats that are available depend on the type of field thatyou are editing.
Offset
Displays the offset for the selected field type, for example, for "Next Page," "Page Numbers" or "Previous Page".You can enter a new offset value which will be added to the displayed page number.
If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not usethe Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide.
Level
Change the defined values and outline levels for the "Chapter" field type.
Name
Displays the name of a field variable. If you want, you can enter a new name.
Value
Displays the current value of the field variable. If you want, you can enter a new value.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
140 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Fixed content
Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
Condition
Displays the condition that must be met for the field to be activated. If you want, you can enter a new condition.
Then, Else
Change the field contents that are displayed depending on whether the field condition is met or not.
Macro
Opens the Run Macros, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in thedocument. This button is only available for the "Execute macro" function field.
Reference
Insert or modify the reference text for the selected field.
Macro name
Displays the name of the macro assigned to the selected field.
Placeholder
Displays the placeholder text of the selected field.
Insert Text
Displays the text that is linked to a condition.
Formula
Displays the formula of a formula field.
Invisible
Hides the field contents in the document. The field is inserted as a thin gray mark in the document. This option is onlyavailable for the "Set Variable" and "User Field" field types.
Apply
Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
141 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Delete
Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the currentdocument. To remove a field that is used in the current document from the list, first delete all instances of the field inthe document, and then remove it from the list.
Left Arrow
Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document. This button is only active when a document containsmore than one field of the same type.
Previous Field
Right Arrow
Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document. This button is only active when a document contains morethan one field of the same type.
Next Field
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.11. IBM Lotus Symphony
Editing the footnote and endnote in documents
You can edit the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose thiscommand.
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Footnote and Endnote
To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the footnote area at the bottom of the page, or at the end of thedocument.
To quickly jump to the footnote or endnote text, click the anchor for note in the document.You can also position the cursor in front of or behind the marker, and then pressCtrl+Shift+PgDn. To jump back to the anchor for the note, press PgUp.
Numbering
Select the numbering type for the footnote or endnote.
Auto
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
142 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert. To change the settings forautomatic numbering, choose Tools - Footnote and Endnote .
Character
Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter or number. Toassign a special character, click the button at the bottom.
...
Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor.
To change the format of a footnote or endnote anchor or text, select it, and then choosepress F11 (Mac special use) to open the Style List window and modify the footnote orendnote paragraph style.
Type
Select the type of note to insert, that is, footnote or endnote. A footnote is placed at the bottom of the current page,whereas an endnote is placed at the end of the document.
Footnote
Converts an endnote to a footnote.
Endnote
Converts a footnote to an endnote.
Arrow left
Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
Previous footnote
Arrow right
Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
Next footnote
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.12. IBM Lotus Symphony
Edit Sections
Changes the properties of sections defined in your document.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
143 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To insert a section, select text or click in your document, and then choose Create - Section.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Sections
The Edit Sections dialog is similar to the Create - Section dialog, and offers the following additional options:
Section
Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list. If the cursor is currently in asection, the section name is displayed on the right side of the status bar at the bottom of the document window.
The current write protection status of a section is indicated by the lock symbol in front of the section name in the list.An open lock is unprotected and a closed lock is protected. Similarly, visible sections are indicated by a glassessymbol.
Options
Opens the Options dialog, where you can edit the column layout, background, footnote and endnote behavior of theselected section. If the section is password protected, you must enter the password first.
Remove
Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.13. IBM Lotus Symphony
Field Shadings
Shows or hides field shadings in your document, including non-breaking spaces, indexes, and footnotes.
To access this command...
Choose View - Field Shadings
Ctrl+F8
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.14. IBM Lotus Symphony
Switching the display of field names and field contents
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
144 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
You can switch the field display between field names and field contents. A check mark indicates that the field namesare displayed, and no check mark indicates that field contents are displayed. Some field contents cannot bedisplayed.
To access this command...
Choose View - Fields
Ctrl+F9
To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose File - Preferences - Symphony- Lotus Symphony Documents - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area.
When you print a document with View - Fields enabled, you are prompted to include the field names in the print out.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.15. IBM Lotus Symphony
Displaying formatting symbols in Documents
You can display nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
To access this command...
Choose View - Nonprinting Characters
Or
On Editing toolbar, click
Nonprinting Characters
Optional: To specify which symbols are displayed, click File > Preferences > Symphony > Lotus SymphonyDocuments > Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display area.
When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that thecursor is in.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.16. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
145 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Hidden Paragraphs
Shows or hides hidden paragraphs. This option only affects the screen display of hidden paragraphs, and not theprinting of hidden paragraphs.
To access this command...
Choose View - Hidden Paragraphs
To enable this feature, choose File - Preferences - Symphony - Lotus SymphonyDocuments - Formatting Aids , and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in theDisplay of area is selected.
Use the field command "Hidden Paragraph" to assign a condition that must be met to hide a paragraph. If thecondition is not met, the paragraph is displayed.
When you hide a paragraph, footnotes and frames that are anchored to characters in the paragraph are also hidden.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.17. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding manual breaks
You can create a manual line break, column break, or a page break at the current cursor position.
To display manual breaks, click View > Nonprint Characters.
To add a manual break, click Create > Break.
Line break
Ends the current line, and moves the text to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph.
Column break
Inserts a manual column break, and moves the text to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. Amanual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column.
Page break
Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. Theinserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page.
Style
Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break.
Change page number
Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is onlyavailable if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break. You can enter the newpage number for the page.
Related reference
Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even PagesCreating and applying page styles
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
146 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
About Headers and Footers
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.18. IBM Lotus Symphony
Insert Section
Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose thiscommand to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply customcolumn layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Section
You can insert an entire document in a section, or a named section from another. You can also insert a section as aDDE link.
To edit a section, choose Layout - Sections .
The Insert Section dialog contains the following tabs:
Section
Sets the properties of the section.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
Indents
Indents the section with a left and right margin.
Background
Set the background color or graphic.
Footnotes and Endnotes
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
147 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats.
Insert
Inserts the section that you defined at the current cursor position in the document.
Related reference
Hiding TextConditional TextQuerying User Data in Fields or ConditionsDisplaying Hidden TextCreating Non-printing TextInserting other fields such as document informationFormula
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.19. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding sections
You can create a section, and set the properties of the section, such as adding password protection and preventing asection from being printed.
To add a section, click Create > Section and select the Section tab.
New section
Type a name for the new section. By default, IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ automatically assigns the name SectionXto new sections, where X is a consecutive number.
Link
Inserts the contents of another section in the current document as a link.
DDE
Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE optionis only available if the Link check box is selected.The general syntax for a DDE command is: "<Server> <Topic> <Item>", where server is the DDE name for theapplication that contains the data. Topic refers to the location of the Item (usually the file name), and Itemrepresents the actual object.
File name / DDE command
Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file. Ifthe DDE check box is selected, enter the DDE command that you want to use.
Section
Select the section that you want to insert as a link.
Protect
Prevents the selected section from being edited. To remove the protection, click Layout > Sections.
With password
Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of five characters. Click ... tochange the current password.
Hide
Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed. The components of a hidden section display as notavailable in the Navigator. When you hover your mouse pointer over a hidden component in the Navigator, the Helptip "hidden" is displayed. You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on a page, or in a header, footer,footnote, frame, or table cell.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
148 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
With condition
Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
Editable in read-only document
Select to allow editing of the section's contents even if the document is opened in read-only mode.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.20. IBM Lotus Symphony
Indents
Indents the section with a left and right margin.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Section - Indents tab or choose Layout - Sections
Before section
Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin.
After section
Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.21. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting footnote and endnote in documents
You can insert a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursorposition.
You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol.
The following applies to both footnotes and endnotes.
Footnotes are inserted at the end of a page, and endnotes are inserted at the end of a document.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Footnote and Endnote
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
149 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Open context menu - choose Footnote and Endnote (inserted Footnote and Endnote)
Numbering
Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes.
Automatic
Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert.
To change the settings for automatic numbering, choose Edit - Footnote and Endnote.
Character
Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
This can be either a letter or number. To assign a special character, click the button at the bottom.
...
Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor.
Type
Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering.
Footnote
Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of thepage.
Endnote
Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of thedocument.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.22. IBM Lotus Symphony
Create Document Bookmark
Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at alater time.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
150 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - Document Bookmark
To jump to a specific bookmark, press F5 to open the Navigator, click the plus sign (+) next to the Bookmark entry,and then double-click the bookmark.
You can also right-click the Page Number field at the left end of the Status Bar at the bottom of the document window,and then choose the bookmark that you want to jump to.
Bookmarks
Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the currentdocument. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete.
You cannot use the following characters in a bookmark name: / \ @ : * ? " ; , . #
Delete
To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Create Document Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button.No confirmation dialog will follow.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.23. IBM Lotus Symphony
Add Caption
Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
You can also access this command by right-clicking the item that you want to add the caption to.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Caption
Open context menu - choose Add Caption
Properties
Set the caption options for the current selection.
Category
Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the captionnumber in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name.For example, the "Illustration" caption category is formatted with the "Illustration" paragraph style.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
151 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Numbering
Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption.
Caption
Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number.
Separator
Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text.
Position
Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects.
Options
Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraphstyle, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
AutoCaption
Opens the Caption dialog.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.24. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting other fields such as document information
Inserts a field at the current cursor position.
The dialog lists all available fields.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Fields - Others
About Fields
Document
Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, userdata, date, and time.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
152 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Cross-references
This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referencedfields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
The advantage of entering a cross-reference as a field is that you do not have to adjust the references manually everytime you change the document. Just update the fields with F9 (Mac special use) and the references in the documentare updated too.
Functions
Depending on the field type that you select, you can assign conditions to certain functions. For example, you candefine a field that executes a macro when you click the field in the document, or a condition that, when met, hides afield. You can also define placeholder fields that insert graphics, tables, frames and other objects into your documentwhen needed.
DocInformation
DocInformation fields contain information about the properties of a document, such as the date a document wascreated. To view the properties of a document, choose File - File Properties.
Variables
Variable fields let you add dynamic content to your document. For example, you can use a variable to reset the pagenumbering.
Insert
Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button.
Related reference
Hiding TextConditional TextQuerying User Data in Fields or ConditionsDisplaying Hidden TextCreating Non-printing TextInsert SectionFormula
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.25. IBM Lotus Symphony
Document
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
153 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Fields are used to insert information about the current document, for example, file name, template, statistics, userdata, date, and time.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Fields - Others - Document tab
Type
Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and thenclick Insert. The following fields are available:
Table 1. Options on the Type list
Type Meaning
Author Inserts the name of the user who first saved the document.
To view the name of the author, choose File - File Properties, click the Generaltab, and then look at the Created line. The name of the author is appended tothe Created line only if the Apply user data check box is selected.
Chapter Inserts the chapter number and/or the chapter name.
Date Inserts the current date. You can insert the date as a fixed field - Date (fixed) -that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Date - that it is updatedautomatically. To manually update the Date field, press F9 (Mac special use).
File name Inserts the filename and/or the directory path of the current document, as wellas the filename without extension.
Page Inserts the page number of the current, previous, or next page.
Sender Inserts fields containing user data.
Statistics Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To viewthe statistics of a document, choose File - File Properties, and then click theStatistics tab.
Templates Inserts the filename, the path, or the filename without the file extension of thecurrent template. You can also insert the names of the "Category" and the"Style" formats used in the current template. To view the names of thetemplate categories and the styles used in the templates, choose File -Template Organizer.
Time Inserts the current time. You can insert the time as a fixed field - Time (fixed) -that does not change, or as a dynamic field - Time - that it is updatedautomatically. To manually update the Time field, press F9 (Mac special use).
The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in theType list.
Select
Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then clickInsert.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
154 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Ctrl and double-click the field.
Table 2. Options on the Select list
Field Function
Previous page Inserts the page number of the previous page in the document.
Next page Inserts the page number of the next page in the document.
Page Number Inserts the current page number.
In the Format field, click the numbering format that you want to use.
If you want, you can enter an Offset for the displayed page number. With an Offset value of 1, the field will display anumber that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of thedocument, this same field will be empty.
Offset
Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use theOffset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide.
Format
Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
When you click "Additional formats", the Number Format dialog opens, where you can define a custom format.
If you choose "Chapter number without separator" for a chapter field, the separators that are specified for chapternumber in Layout - Outline Numbering are not displayed.
If you choose "chapter number" as the format for reference fields, only the number of the chapter heading containingthe referenced object is displayed in the field. If the paragraph style for the chapter heading is not numbered, the fieldis left blank.
The following number range formats are for paragraphs formatted with numbered or bulleted lists:
Table 3. Format options
Format Meaning
Category andnumber
The format contains everything between the beginning of the paragraphand directly after the number-range field
Caption text The format contains the text following the number-range field up to theend of the paragraph
Number The format only contains the reference number
Fixed content
Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
155 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Layer
Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field.
Offset in days/minutes
Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field.
Value
Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.26. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating cross-references and bookmarks
A cross-reference refers to a field that appears in another location in a document. A bookmark identifies a location orselection of text that you name and identify for future reference.
The advantage of entering a cross-reference as a field is that you do not have to adjust the references manually everytime you change the document. Just update the fields with F9 (Mac special use) and the references in the documentare updated too. Bookmarks are used to mark certain text passages in a document, for example, to jump from onepassage in the document to another.
To create a cross-reference, click Create > Cross-reference.
To set a reference, click Set Reference and specify a name for the reference, and then click Insert. Thename displays as an identifier in the Selection list.
1.
To insert a reference, click Insert Reference, and select the identifier from the Selection list. If you selecttext in the document, and then insert a reference, the selected text becomes the contents of the filed thatyou insert.
2.
Select the format type that you want to apply to the selected reference and click Insert.
Page
Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target.
Chapter
Inserts the number of the chapter containing the reference target.
Reference
Inserts the complete reference target text.
Above/Below
Inserts "above" or "below", depending on the location of the reference target relative to the position of thereference field.
As Page Style
Inserts the number of the page containing the reference target using the format specified in the pagestyle.
3.
You can also insert headings, numbered paragraphs, text, and bookmarks. Select the type that you want to insert inthe Type list, and then select the available fields for the selected type in the Selection list.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
156 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To insert a bookmark, click Create > Document Bookmark.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.27. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting references to indexes and tables
Opens a menu to insert index entries and to insert indexes and tables.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References
Instructions for Indexes
Entry
Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
Indexes and Tables
Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position. To edit an index or table of contents, place thecursor in the index or table of contents, and then choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.28. IBM Lotus Symphony
Creating an index
You can create an index that lists the terms and topics discussed in the document.
To create an index:
Place cursor when you want the index in the document.1.Click Create > References > Indexes and Tables.2.On the Index/Table tab, select Alphabetical Index in the Type field.3.If you want to protect the contents of the index from being changed, select Protected against manualchanges.
4.
Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter in Create index/table field.5.Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this window. Forexample, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then selectAlphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab.
6.
Click OK.7.To update the index, first click the index and then right-click the index, and click Update Index/Table.8.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
157 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.29. IBM Lotus Symphony
Adding the chapter number to the caption label
You can add the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to aparagraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Caption - Options
Open context menu - choose Caption - Options
Numbering by chapter
When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading isencountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be"Figure 2.1".
Level
Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label.
Separator
Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number.
Category and frame format
Character style
Specifies the character style.
Apply border and shadow
Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.30. IBM Lotus Symphony
Styles
You can assign different paragraph styles to change the formatting of index titles, separators and index entries. Youcan also modify paragraph styles in this dialog.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
158 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables - Styles tab
Assignment
Levels
Select the index level that you change the formatting of.
Paragraph Styles
Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign ( >) button.
>
Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style.
Default
Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style.
Edit
Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.31. IBM Lotus Symphony
Index/Table
Use this tab to specify and define the type of index that you want to insert. You can also create custom indexes.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table tab(depending on the type)
Depending on the type of index that you select, this tab contains the following options.
Table of Contents
The following options are available when you select Table of Contents as the index type.
Alphabetical Index
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
159 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
The following options are available when you select Alphabetical Index as the index type.
Illustration Index
The following options are available when you select the Illustration Index as the index type.
Index of Tables
The following options are available when you select Index of Tables as the index type.
User-Defined
The following options are available when you select User-Defined as the index type.
Table of Objects
The following options are available when you select Table of Objects as the index type.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.32. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting options for alphabetical index
The following options are available when you select Alphabetical Index as the index type.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table tab (when Alphabetical Indexis the selected type)
Type and Title
Specify the type and title of the index.
Type
Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that youselect. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Create - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, you canthen edit that index.
Title
Enter a title for the selected index.
Protected against manual changes
Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
160 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose File - Preferences - Symphony -Lotus Symphony Documents - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.
Create index for
Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
Options
Combine identical entries
Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in thedocument. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43".
Combine identical entries with p or pp
Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that liststhe first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p".
Combine with -
Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where theentry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12".
Case sensitive
Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages specialhandling applies. If you want the first occurrence of the entry in the document to determine the case of the entry,select Combine identical entries.
To use multi-level collation to Asian languages, select Case sensitive. In the multi-levelcollation, the cases and diacritics of the entries are ignored and only the primitive forms ofthe entries are compared. If the forms are identical, the diacritics of the forms arecompared. If the forms are still identical, the cases of the forms as well as the widths ofthe characters, and the differences in the Japanese Kana are compared.
AutoCapitalize entries
Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry.
Keys as separate entries
Inserts index keys as separate index entries. A key is inserted as a top level index entry and the entries that areassigned to the key as indented subentries.
To define an index key, choose Index Entry dialog.
Concordance file
Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index.
File
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
161 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
Sort
Sets the options for sorting the index entries.
Language
Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries.
Key type
Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want tosort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.33. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting options for illustration index
The following options are available when you select the Illustration Index as the index type.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table tab (when Illustration Indexis the selected type)
Type and Title
Specify the type and title of the index.
Type
Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that youselect. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Create - References - Indexes and Tables, you can then editthat index.
Title
Enter a title for the selected index.
Protected against manual changes
Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when theindex is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose File - Preferences - Symphony -Lotus Symphony Documents - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
162 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Create index for
Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
Create from
Specify the information to be combined to form an index.
Captions
Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Create -Caption.
Category
Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries.
Display
Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options thatcan be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automaticallygenerated, and "The Sun" was added by the user.
Table 1. Options in the Display list
Option Entry in the Index
Reference Text Illustration 24: The Sun
Category and Number Illustration 24
Caption The Sun
If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in theindex entry.
Object name
Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change themin the context menu.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.34. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting options for index of tables
The following options are available when you select Index of Tables as the index type.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table tab (when Index of Tables is
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
163 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
the selected type)
Type and Title
Specify the type and title of the index.
Type
Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that youselect. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Create - References - Indexes and Tables, you can then editthat index.
Title
Enter a title for the selected index.
Protected against manual changes
Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when theindex is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose File - Preferences - Symphony -Lotus Symphony Documents - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.
Create index for
Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
Create from
Specify the information to be combined to form an index.
Captions
Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Create -Caption.
Category
Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries.
Display
Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options thatcan be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automaticallygenerated, and "The Sun" was added by the user.
Table 1. Options in the Display list
Option Entry in the Index
Reference Text Illustration 24: The Sun
Category and Number Illustration 24
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
164 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Option Entry in the Index
Caption The Sun
If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in theindex entry.
Object name
Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change themin the context menu.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.35. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting options for user-defined index
The following options are available when you select User-Defined as the index type.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table tab (when User-Defined isthe selected type)
User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document.
Type and Title
Specify the type and title of the index.
Type
Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that youselect. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Create - References - Indexes and Tables, you can then editthat index.
Title
Enter a title for the selected index.
Protected against manual changes
Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when theindex is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose File - Preferences - Symphony -Lotus Symphony Documents - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.
Create index for
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
165 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
Create from
Styles
Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraphstyles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
...
Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
Index marks
Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Entry in theindex.
Tables
Includes tables in the index.
Graphics
Includes graphics in the index.
Text frames
Includes text frames in the index.
OLE objects
Includes OLE objects in the index.
Use level from source chapter
Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter headinghierarchy.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.36. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting options for table of objects
The following options are available when you select Table of Objects as the index type.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
166 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table tab (when Table of Objectsis the selected type)
Type and Title
Specify the type and title of the index.
Type
Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that youselect. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Create - References - Indexes and Tables, you can then editthat index.
Title
Enter a title for the selected index.
Protected against manual changes
Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when theindex is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose File - Preferences - Symphony -Lotus Symphony Documents - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.
Create index for
Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
Create from the following objects
Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.37. IBM Lotus Symphony
Assign Styles
Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table, mark"Additional Styles" check box and then click ...
Styles
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
167 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
The list contains the paragraph styles that you can assign to index levels.
To create an index entry from a paragraph style, click the style in the Styles list, and then click the >> button to movethe style to the index level that you want.
<<
Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy.
>>
Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.38. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (indexes/tables)
Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index thatyou selected on the Index/Table tab.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Entries tab (depending on type selected)
Table of Contents
Alphabetical Index
Illustration Index
Index of Tables
User-Defined
Table of Objects
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.39. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (table of contents)
Specify the format of the entries in the table of contents.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
168 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables - Entries tab (whenTable of Contents is the selected type)
Level
Select the level that you want to define.
Structure and formatting
The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you canenter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click acode button.
To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key.
To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button.
To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
Entry text (E)
Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
Tab stop (T)
Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change theposition of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
Page number (#)
Inserts the page number of the entry.
Hyperlink (LS and LE)
Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags.On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then clickthis button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. Allhyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents.
All
Applies the current settings without closing the dialog.
Character Style
Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
Edit
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
169 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
Fill character
Select the tab leader that you want use.
Tab stop position
Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
To right margin
Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
Format
Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or withoutseparator.
Evaluate up to level
Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent
Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab.Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.40. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (alphabetical index)
Specify the format of the alphabetical index entries.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Entries tab (when Alphabetical Index isthe selected type)
Level
Select the level that you want to define.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
170 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Level "S" refers to the single letter headings that divide the index entries alphabetically. To enable these headings,select the Alphabetical delimiter check box in the Format area.
Structure and formatting
The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you canenter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click acode button.
To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key.
To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button.
To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
Entry text (E) – Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
Tab stop (T) – Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. Tochange the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
Chapter Info
Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to displayin the Chapter entry box.
Chapter entry
Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
Evaluate up to level
Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Page number (#) – Inserts the page number of the entry.
Character Style – Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
Edit – Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
Fill character – Select the tab leader that you want use.
Tab stop position – Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
To right margin – Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
171 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Format – Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with orwithout separator.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent – Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" valuedefined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left textmargin.
Character Style for main entries
Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry,click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry .
Alphabetical delimiter
Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings.
Key separated by commas
Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.41. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (illustration index)
Specify the format for the illustration index entries.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Entries tab (when Illustration Index is theselected type)
Level
Select the level that you want to define.
Illustration Indexes only have one index level.
Structure and formatting
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
172 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you canenter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click acode button.
To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key.
To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button.
To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
Entry text (E) – Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
Tab stop (T) – Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. Tochange the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
Page number (#) – Inserts the page number of the entry.
Chapter Info – Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that youwant to display in the Chapter entry box.
Chapter entry – Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Character Style – Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
Edit – Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
Fill character – Select the tab leader that you want use.
Tab stop position – Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
To right margin – Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
Format – Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with orwithout separator.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent – Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
173 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left textmargin.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.42. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (index of tables)
Specify the format for the entries in an Index of Tables.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Entries tab (when Index of Tables is theselected type)
Level
Select the level that you want to define.
An Index of Tables only has one index level.
Structure and formatting
The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you canenter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click acode button.
To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key.
To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button.
To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
Entry text (E) – Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
Tab stop (T) – Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. Tochange the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
Page number (#) – Inserts the page number of the entry.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
174 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Chapter Info – Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that youwant to display in the Chapter entry box.
Chapter entry – Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Character Style – Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
Edit – Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
Fill character – Select the tab leader that you want use.
Tab stop position – Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
To right margin – Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
Format – Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with orwithout separator.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent – Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" valuedefined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left textmargin.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.43. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (user-defined index)
Specify the format for the entries in a user-defined index.
To access this command...
Choose Create > References > Indexes and Tables > Entries tab (when User-Defined isthe selected type)
Level
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
175 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Select the level that you want to define.
User-defined indexes do not support sub-keys.
Structure and formatting
The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you canenter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click acode button.
To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key.
To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button.
To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
Entry text (E) – Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
Tab stop (T) – Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. Tochange the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
Page number (#) – Inserts the page number of the entry.
Chapter Info – Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that youwant to display in the Chapter entry box.
Chapter entry – Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
Character Style – Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
Edit – Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
Fill character – Select the tab leader that you want use.
Tab stop position – Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
To right margin – Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
Format – Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
176 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
without separator.
Evaluate up to level – Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Enter the maximum hierarchylevel that can be shown in the chapter number of the generated index.
Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent – Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" valuedefined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left textmargin.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.44. IBM Lotus Symphony
Entries (table of objects)
Specify the format for the entries in a Table of Objects.
To access this command...
Choose Create - References - Indexes and Tables - Entries tab (when Table of Objects is theselected type)
Level
Select the level that you want to define.
A Table of Objects only has one index level.
Structure and formatting
The Structure line defines how the entries in the index are composed. To change the appearance of an entry you canenter codes or text in the empty boxes on this line. You can also click in an empty box or on a code, and then click acode button.
To delete a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then press the Delete key.
To replace a code from the Structure line, click the code, and then click a code button.
To add a code to the Structure line, click in an empty box, and then click a code button.
Entry text (E) – Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
177 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Tab stop (T) – Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. Tochange the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
Page number (#) – Inserts the page number of the entry.
Chapter Info – Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that youwant to display in the Chapter entry box.
Chapter entry – Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Character Style – Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
Edit – Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
Fill character – Select the tab leader that you want use.
Tab stop position – Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
To right margin – Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
Format – Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with orwithout separator.
Evaluate up to level – Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent – Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" valuedefined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left textmargin.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.45. IBM Lotus Symphony
Frame
Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
178 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - Frame
You can resize or move a selected frame using special shortcut keys.
To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete.
If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through theremaining text.
In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by ared rectangle.
You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn inred, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame.
Type
Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
Options
Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
Wrap
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
You can also specify the spacing between the text and the object.
Hyperlink
Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
Borders
Sets the border options for the selected objects in Lotus® Symphony™ Documents or Lotus SymphonySpreadsheets.
Background
Set the background color or graphic.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
179 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Columns
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
Macro
Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object.
Reset
Resets modified values back to the Lotus Symphony default values.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.46. IBM Lotus Symphony
Create Table
Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns toinclude in the table, and then click in the last cell.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Create Table
Ctrl+F12
Open Editing toolbar, click
Table
To insert a table from another document, copy the table, and then paste the table into the current document.
To convert text into a table, select the text, and then choose Table - Convert - Text to Table.
Lotus® Symphony™ can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. Toactivate this feature, choose File - Preferences - Symphony - Lotus Symphony Documents - Table and click theNumber recognition check box in the Input in tables area.
Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table
Name
Enter a name for the table.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
180 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Size
Specify the number of columns and rows in the new table.
Columns
Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
Rows
Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
Options
Set the options for the table.
Column Header
Select this check box to include the column header in the table. You can specify the number of column header rowsfor the table and have it repeat at the top of each page.
Row label
Select this check box to include the row label in the table. You can specify the number of row label columns for thetable.
Don't split table
Prevents the table from spanning more than one page.
Display border
Adds a border to the table cells.
Instant Formatting
Opens the Instant Formatting dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.47. IBM Lotus Symphony
Footer
Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pagesthat use the same page style. In a new document, only the "Default" page style is listed. Other page styles are addedto the list after you apply them in the document.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
181 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Create - Footer
The footers are visible only when you view the document in print layout (enable View -Normal).
A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have footers.
To remove a footer, choose Create - Footer, and then select the page style containing the footer. The footer isremoved from all of the pages that use this page style.
To add or remove footers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Create - Footer - All.
To format a footer, choose Layout - Properties - Page Properties - Footer .
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.48. IBM Lotus Symphony
Inserting fields into documents
You can insert a field at the current cursor position. The submenu lists the most common field types. To view all of theavailable fields, choose Other.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Fields
Open context menu - choose Fields (inserted fields)
Date
Inserts the current date as a field. The default date format is used, and the date is not automatically updated.
Time
Inserts the current time as a field. The time is taken directly from the system settings of your operating system. Afixed time format is applied, which cannot be updated by using the F9 function key (Mac special use).
Page Numbers
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
182 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position. The default setting is the Page Style format.
Page Count
Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document.
Subject
Inserts the subject specified in the document properties as a field . This field displays the data entered in the Subjectfield under File - File Properties - Description.
Title
Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title fieldunder File - File Properties - Description.
Author
Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field
Other
Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The dialog lists all available fields.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.49. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting pagination options
Specify pagination options.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Properties - Paragraph Properties - Text Flow tab
Choose Layout - Style List - open context menu Modify/New - Text Flow tab
Choose Edit - Find and Replace - Layout - Text Flow tab
Breaks
Specify the page or column break options.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
183 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Insert
Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use.
Type
Select the break type that you want to insert.
Position
Select where you want to insert the break.
With Page Style
Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break.
Page Style
Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break.
Page number
Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current pagenumbering, select "0".
Options
Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break.
Do not split paragraph
Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted.
Keep with next paragraph
Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted.
Orphan control
Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter anumber in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Linesbox, the paragraph is shifted to the next page.
Widow control
Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and thenenter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in theLines box, the position of the break is adjusted.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.50. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
184 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Drop Caps
Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must spanat least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box.
To access this command...
Choose Layout > Properties > Paragraph Properties > Drop Caps tab
Choose Layout > Style List, open context menu, and select Modify/New > Drop Caps tab
Settings
Show Drop Caps
Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph.
Whole word
Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as largetype.
Number of characters
Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps.
Lines
Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorterparagraphs will not get drop caps. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines.
Space to text
Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph.
Contents
Text
Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph.
Character Style
Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the currentparagraph, select [None].
Preview Field
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
185 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Displays a preview of the current selection.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.51. IBM Lotus Symphony
Outline & Numbering
Adds or removes outline level, numbering, or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numberingto use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list.
To access this command...
Choose Layout > Properties > Paragraph Properties > Outline & Numbering tab
Choose Layout > Style List open context menu Modify/New > Outline & Numbering tab(Paragraph Styles)
To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose Layout > StyleList, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then clickthe Outline & Numbering tab.
1.
To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Layout > Properties > ParagraphProperties , and then click the Outline & Numbering tab.
2.
Outline level
Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style. Select Body text to reset theoutline level.
The paragraphs will be included in a table of contents if you enable the Outline checkbox.
If you already assigned an outline numbering to the paragraph or Paragraph Style, the Outline level list box is notavailable.
Numbering
This section only appears when you edit the properties of the current paragraph by choosing Layout > Properties >Paragraph Properties.
Numbering Style
Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Styles andFormatting window if you click the Numbering Style icon.
Restart at this paragraph
Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
186 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Start with
Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphsare numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here.
Line numbering
Specify the Line numbering options. To add line numbers to your document, choose Tools - Line Numbers.
Include this paragraph in line numbering
Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering.
Restart at this paragraph
Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter.
Start with
Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.52. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting up page formatting in Documents
You can specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers andfooters, and the page background.
If Asian language support is enabled under File > Preferences > Symphony > Language Settings > Languages,you can add a text grid to the current page style. To return all page formatting options to default installation values,click Restore Defaults on the dialog. You can access page formatting options in several ways:
Click File > Page Setup.Click Layout > Properties > Page Properties.Click Layout > Style List to open the Style List dialog. Choose Page Styles under Style Type: and then clickModify... or New....
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.53. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting columns properties for a page, frame, or section
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
187 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Layout > Properties > Page Properties, and then click the Columns tab.
Choose Layout > Style List, then select Page Styles in the Style type box. Right-click anyitem of the listed styles, and select Modify. Click the Columns tab.
Choose Create > Frame > Columns tab.
Choose Create/Layout > Section(s) > Columns tab.
Settings
You can select from predefined column layouts, or create your own. When you apply a layout to a page style, allpages that use the style are updated. Similarly, when you apply a column layout to a frame style, all frames that usethat style are updated. You can also change the column layout for a single frame.
Columns
You can also select one of the predefined column layouts.
Selection fields
Evenly distribute contents to all columns
Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections.
Width and spacing
If the Automatic width check box is selected, enter the width and spacing options for the columns.
(Column number)
Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns.
Width
Enter the width of the column.
Spacing
Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
Instant Width
Creates columns of equal width.
Preview Field
Displays a preview of the current selection.
The column layout preview only shows the columns and not the surrounding page.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
188 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Separator line
This area is only available if your layout contains more than one column.
Line
Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None".
Height
Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area.
Position
Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than100%.
Apply to
Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to. This option is only available if you access this dialog bychoosing Layout > Columns.
Properties
Text direction
Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complextext layout support is enabled.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.54. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting properties for sections in documents
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for the section.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Sections - Options button
Sections follow the text flow behavior of the page they are inserted into.
For example, if you insert a section that uses a two-column layout into a page style that uses a four-column layout, thetwo-column layout is nested inside one of the four columns.
You can also nest sections, that is, you can insert a section into another section.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
189 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Columns
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
Indents
Indents the section with a left and right margin.
Background
Set the background color or graphic.
Footnote and Endnote
Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.55. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting footnote layout options
You can specify the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body ofthe document.
To access the footnote layout, click File > Page Setup and select the Footnote tab.
Not larger than page area
Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes.
Maximum footnote height
Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Select this check box, and then enter the height.
Space to text
Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area.
Position
Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area.
Weight
Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, select 0.0 pt.
Length
Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area.
Spacing to footnote contents
Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area.
To specify the spacing between two footnotes, click Layout > Properties > Paragraph Properties , and thenclick the Indents and Spacing tab.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
190 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.56. IBM Lotus Symphony
Specifying the position of footnotes and endnotes
You can specify where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Section - Footnote and Endnote tab
Choose Layout - Sections - Options button Footnote and Endnote tab
This tab is not available in Normal view.
Footnotes
Collect at end of text
Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to thebottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear.
Restart numbering
Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify.
Start at
Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote.
Custom format
Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes. This check box is only available if the Restart numbering checkbox is selected.
Before
Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number.
Spin button own format
Select the numbering style for the footnotes.
After
Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
191 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Endnotes
Collect at end of section
Adds endnotes at the end of the section.
Restart numbering
Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify.
Start at
Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote.
Custom format
Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes. This check box is only available if you the Restart numberingcheck box is selected.
Before
Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number
Spin button own format
Select the numbering style for the endnotes.
After
Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.57. IBM Lotus Symphony
Text Grid
Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under File> Preferences > Symphony > Language Settings > Languages.
To access this command...
Select Layout - Properties - Page Properties - Text Grid
Grid
A grid is a set of guidelines to align contents on a page.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
192 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
No grid
Removes a grid for lines or characters.
Grid (lines only)
Adds a grid for lines.
Specify line grid as visual reference only
Shows a line grid as visual reference. Texts on the page may not stay within the grid lines.
Note: This option shows the settings of the current document. You cannot change it.
Grid (lines and characters)
Adds a grid for lines and characters.
Specify line grid as visual reference only
Shows a grid as visual reference. Texts on the page may not stay within the guidelines.
Note: This option shows the settings of the current document. You cannot change it.
Snap to characters
Snaps text to the character grid.
Grid layout
Lines per page
Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page.
Characters per line
Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line.
Max. base text size
Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line.
Max. Ruby text size
Enter the font size for the Ruby text.
Ruby text below/left from base text
Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text.
Grid display
Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
193 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.58. IBM Lotus Symphony
Graphic properties
Specifies the size, position, and other properties of the selected graphic.
Select the graphic, and then clickLayout > Properties > Graphic Properties.
Position and Size - Specifies horizontal/vertical position and width/height of the graphica.Options - Specifies properties for the graphic such as name, alternative text, description and so onb.Wrap - Specifies the way you want text to wrap around the graphicc.Hyperlink - Specifies the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphicd.Graphics - Specifies the flip properties and linked file path for the selected graphice.Crop - Specifies the scale and image size of the graphicf.Borders - Specifies the border properties for the graphicg.Background - Specifies the background for the graphich.Macro - Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphici.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.59. IBM Lotus Symphony
Type
Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Style List - open context menu Modify/New - Type tab
Choose Create - Frame - Type tab
Size
Width
Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
Relative
Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area.
Height
Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
Relative
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
194 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area.
Keep ratio
Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
Original Size
Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values.
This option is not available for frames.
Automatic
Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify aminimum width or minimum height for the frame.
The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame.
Anchor
Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. The anchor options are not available when you openthe dialog from the Style List window.
To page
Anchors the selection to the current page.
To paragraph
Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
To character
Anchors the selection to a character.
As character
Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
Position
Specify the location of the selected object on the current page.
Horizontal
Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character".
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
195 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
by
Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that youselect in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box.
to
Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box.
Mirror on even pages
Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
You can also use the Graphics flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and oddpages.
Vertical
Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center"alignment options are available.
by
Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that youselect in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Top" or "From Bottom" (as character) in theVertical box.
to
Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
Follow text flow
Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place theselected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
Preview Field
Displays a preview of the current selection.
The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. Ifyou anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
196 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.60. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting wrap properties
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
You can also specify the spacing between the text and the object.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Wrap
Choose Create - Frame - Wrap tab
To wrap text around a table, place the table in a frame, and then wrap the text around theframe.
Settings
None
Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object,but not on the sides of the object.
No Wrap
Before
Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space.
Wrap Before
After
Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space.
Wrap After
Page
Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
197 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Page Wrap
Through
Places the object in front of the text.
Wrap Through
Optimal
Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distancebetween the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
Optimal Page Wrap
Options
Specify the text wrap options.
First Paragraph
Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
The space between the paragraphs is determined by the size of the object.
In Background
Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
Contour
Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
To change the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose
Format - Wrap -Edit Contour .
Spacing
Specify the amount of space to leave between the selected object and the text.
Left
Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text.
Right
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
198 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text.
Top
Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text.
Bottom
Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.61. IBM Lotus Symphony
Contour Editor
Changes the contour of the selected object. Lotus® Symphony™ displays a preview of the contour.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Wrap - Edit Contour
Select
Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour.
Select
Rectangle
Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag.
Rectangle
Ellipse
Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag.
Ellipse
Polygon
Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag todraw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remainingline segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45degree, hold down Shift when you click.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
199 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Polygon
Edit Points
Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour.
Edit Points
Move Points
Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour.
Move Points
Insert Points
Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contouroutline.
Insert Points
Delete Points
Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete.
Delete Points
Undo
Reverses the last action.
Undo
Redo
Reverses the action of the last Undo command.
Redo
Tolerance
Enter the color tolerance for the eyedropper as a percentage. To increase the color range that the eyedropperselects, enter a high percentage.
Related reference
Wrapping Text Around ObjectsInserting graphics
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
200 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.62. IBM Lotus Symphony
Graphics
Specifies the flip and the link options for the selected graphic.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Properties - Graphics Properties... - Graphics tab
Color Correction
Red
Specifies the amount of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no red) to+100% (full red) are possible.
Blue
Specifies the amount of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic. Values from -100% (no blue) to+100% (full blue) are possible.
Green
Specifies the amount of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no green)to +100% (full green) are possible.
Luminance
Brightness
Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (only black) to +100% (only white) arepossible.
Contrast
Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (fullcontrast) are possible.
Gamma
Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.Values from 0,10 (minimum Gamma) to 10 (maximum Gamma) are possible.
Transparency
Specifies the transparency in the graphic object. Values from 0% (opaque) to +100% (transparent) are possible.
Graphics Mode
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
201 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will notbe changed, only the view of the object.
Graphics mode
Default
The view of the graphic object is not changed.
Grayscale
The graphic object is shown in grayscale. A color graphic object can become monochrome in grayscale. You can alsoachieve tinted grayscale colors by raising one of the color parameters.
Black/White
The graphic object is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% will appear black, all over 50% willappear white.
Watermark
The graphic object is reduced in brightness and contrast so that is suitable to be used in the background as awatermark.
Image Filter
Opens the Filter window, where you can use various filters on the selected graphic image.
Invert
Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image.
Invert
Smooth
Softens the contrast in an image.
Smooth
Sharpen
Increases the contrast in an image.
Sharpen
Remove Noise
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
202 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Removes single pixels from an image.
Remove Noise
Solarization
Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there istoo much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted.
Solarization
Parameters
Specifies the degree and type of solarization.
Threshold Value
Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized.
Invert
Specifies whether the pixels to be solarized are also to be inverted.
Aging
Opens a dialog for setting the aging function. Each time you call this function, the image appears a little bit darker; thecolors can be made more gray or brown.
Aging
Aging Degree
Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. The higher the value, the more the image ages.
Posterize
Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number ofcolors. It makes photos look like paintings.
Posterize
Poster Colors
Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced.
Pop Art
Converts an image to a pop-art format. By applying color alienation, the image acquires a completely new character.This function can be applied to the whole image or to parts of it.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
203 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Pop Art
Charcoal Sketch
Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors aresuppressed. You can apply this function to the whole image or to a part of it.
Charcoal Sketch
Relief
Displays a dialog for creating relieves. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines thetype of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief.
Relief
Light Source
Specifies the light source position. A dot represents the light source.
Mosaic
Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, thefewer details the graphic image has.
Mosaic
Width
Defines the width of the individual tiles.
Height
Defines the height of the individual tiles.
Enhance edges
Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
Flip
Vertically
Flips the selected graphic vertically.
Horizontally
Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
On all pages
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
204 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Flips the selected graphic horizontally on all pages.
On left pages
Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on even pages.
On right pages
Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages.
Link
Inserts the graphic as a link.
File name
Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the browse button ( ... ) and then locate the file thatyou want to link to.
...
Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open .
Note: Flip and Link functions are applied for Document only.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.63. IBM Lotus Symphony
Assigning macro for objects in documents
Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object.
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Image Map - open context menu - Macro
Choose Create - Hyperlink - Events icon (look for Help tip)
Choose Layout - Properties - Text Properties - Hyperlink tab - Events button
Event
Lists the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to the selected object are listed.
The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro:
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
205 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Event Event trigger OLEobject
Graphics Frame ImageMaparea
Hyperlink
Clickobject
object isselected
x x x
Mouseoverobject
mousepointermoves overthe object
x x x x x
TriggerHyperlink
hyperlink thatis assignedto the objectis clicked
x x x x
Mouseleavesobject
mousepointermoves offthe object
x x x x x
Graphicsloadsuccessful
graphic isloadedsuccessfully
x
Graphicsloadterminated
loading ofthe graphic isterminatedby the user(for example,whendownloading)
x
Graphicsload faulty
graphic is notsuccessfullyloaded
x
Input ofalphacharacters
text isinputted
x
Input ofnon-alphacharacters
Nonprintingcharacters,such as tabsand linebreaks, areentered
x
Resizeframe
frame isresized
x
Moveframe
frame ismoved
x
For events that are linked to controls in forms, see Control properties or Form properties.
Macro
Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs.
Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by Lotus® Symphony™Documents or by the function. See the Lotus Symphony Basic Help for more information.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
206 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Category
Lists the Lotus Symphony program and any open Lotus Symphony document. Within this list, select the locationwhere you want to save the macros.
Macro name
Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign.
Assign
Assigns the selected to the selected event.
Remove
Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.64. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting hyperlink properties for objects in documents
Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
To access this command...
Choose Create - Frame - Hyperlink tab
Link to
Set the link properties.
URL
Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open, for example, http://www.sun.com, or file:///c|/Lotus®Symphony™/Document/Internet.sdw.
Browse
Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or onan FTP server in the Internet.
Name
Enter a name for the hyperlink.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
207 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Frame
Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names aredescribed here.
Image Map
Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that youenter on this page.
Server-side image map
Uses a server-side image map.
Client-side image map
Uses the image map that you created for the selected object.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.65. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting properties for objects in documents
You can specify properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Styles List - open context menu Modify/New - Options tab
Choose Create - Frame - Options tab
Name
Enter a name for the selected item.
Assign an object, graphic or frame a meaningful name, so that you can quickly locate itafterwards in long documents.
Alternative text (graphics, and objects only)
Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assistpeople with disabilities.
Previous link
Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add orchange the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
208 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
must be empty.
Next link
Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or changethe next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty.
Protect
Specifies protection options for the selected item.
Protect Contents
Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item.
You can still copy the contents of the selected item.
Protect Position
Locks the position of the selected item in the current document.
Protect Size
Locks the size of the selected item.
Properties
Specifies print and text options for the selected item.
Editable in read-only document (frames only)
Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected).
Includes the selected item when you print the document.
Text direction
Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Usesuperordinate object settings from the list.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.66. IBM Lotus Symphony
Changing properties for an object in documents
Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
209 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Layout > Properties and then select the corresponding object properties
Type
Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
Options
Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
Wrap
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and theobject.
Hyperlink
Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
Borders
Sets the border options for the selected objects in Lotus® Symphony™ Documents or Lotus SymphonySpreadsheets.
Background
Set the background color or graphic.
Macro
Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object.
Reset
Resets modified values back to the Lotus Symphony default values.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.67. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
210 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Setting table properties
You can specify the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders,and background.
To set table properties, click the table, and then select Table > Table Properties.
Table
Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table.
Text Flow
Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
Rows and Columns
Specify the column width properties.
Borders
Set the border options for the selected item or the current paragraph.
Background
You can select a background color or graphic object.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.68. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting table properties in documents
Specify the size, position, spacing, and align options for the selected table.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Table Properties - Table tab
Properties
Name
Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator.
Width
Enter the width of the table. This check box is only available if the Automatic option in the Alignment area is notselected.
Relative to page
Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width.
Alignment
Set the alignment options for the selected table.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
211 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Automatic
Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins.
Left
Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin.
From left
Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Margin to table spacing area.
Right
Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin.
Center
Centers the table horizontally on the page.
Manual
Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area.Lotus® Symphony™ automatically calculates the table width. Select this option if you want to specify the individualcolumn widths.
Margin to table Spacing
Left
Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table. This optionis not available if the Automatic or the Left option is selected in the Alignment area.
Right
Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table. This optionis not available if the Automatic or the Right option is selected in the Alignment area.
Above
Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table.
Below
Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table.
To insert a paragraph before a table at the beginning of a document, header or footer, placethe cursor before any content in the first cell, and then press Enter.
Properties
Text direction – Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
212 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
available if complex text layout support is enabled.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.69. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting rows and columns in tables
Specify the properties for rows and columns in tables.
To access this command...
Select Table > Table Properties, and then click the Rows and Columns tab.
Adapt table width
Maintains the current width of the table when you change the width of a column. This option is not available ifAutomatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab.
Adjust columns proportionally
Resizes the table width in relation to the column width that you enter. This option is not available if Automatic isselected in the Alignment area on the Table tab.
Remaining space
Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table,click the Table tab.
Column width
Specify the column widths for the table. You can enter the width that you want in the boxes.
Left Arrow
Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column.
Right Arrow
Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column.
Headers and labels
Specifies the column header and row label.
Column Header
Check this to include the column header in the table. You could also enter the number of column header that you wantin the table, and have it repeat at the top of each page.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
213 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Row label
Check this to include the row label in the table. You could also enter the number of row label that you want in the table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.70. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting text flow before and after the table
Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Table Properties - Text Flow tab
Page/Column Breaks
Insert manual break
Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table.
Page
Inserts a page break before or after the table.
Column
Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page.
Before
Inserts a page or column break before the table.
After
Inserts a page or column break after the table.
With Page Style
Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break.
Page Style
Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break.
Page number
Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
214 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Allow table to automatically break across pages and columns
Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table.
Allow for page column breaks within rows
Allows a page break or column break inside a row of a table.
Keep with next paragraph
Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break.
Text direction
Select the direction for the text in the cells.
Vertical alignment
Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.71. IBM Lotus Symphony
Cell
This command is only available if you have selected a table in your document, or if the cursor is in a table cell.
To access this command...
Right-click in a table, choose Cell
Merge
Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
Top
Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
Middle
Centers the contents of the cell horizontally in the cell.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
215 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Bottom
Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
Protect
Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
Unprotect
Removes the cell protection for all of the cells in the current table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.72. IBM Lotus Symphony
Merge cells
Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Merge Cells
On the Table Object Bar, click
Merge Cells
Merging cells can lead to calculation errors in formulas in the table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.73. IBM Lotus Symphony
Split Cells
Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Split Cells
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
216 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
On the Toolbar Bar, click
Split Cells
Split cell into
Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the one or more selected cells into.
Horizontally
Splits the one or more selected cells into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box.
Into equal proportions
Splits cells into columns of equal width or row of equal height.
Vertically
Splits the one or more selected cells into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.74. IBM Lotus Symphony
Protect
Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
To access this command...
In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Protect
When the cursor is in a read-only cell, a note appears on the Status Bar.
To remove cell protection, select the cell(s), and then choose Layout - Cell - Remove Protection .
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.75. IBM Lotus Symphony
Unprotect
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
217 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Removes the cell protection for all of the cells in the current table.
To access this command...
In the context menu of a cell, choose Text and Cell Properties - Unprotect
Open context menu in Navigator for tables
To remove the protection from several tables at once, select the tables, and then press Ctrl+Shift+T. To remove theprotection from all of the tables in a document, click anywhere in the document, and then press Ctrl+Shift+T.
You can also remove cell protection from a table in the Navigator.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.76. IBM Lotus Symphony
Top
Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Cell - Top
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.77. IBM Lotus Symphony
Center
Centers the contents of the cell horizontally in the cell.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Cell - Center
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.78. IBM Lotus Symphony
Aligning the cell to bottom in a table
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
218 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
To access this command...
Select Table > Cell Alignment > Bottom
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.79. IBM Lotus Symphony
Row
Set the height of rows, or select, insert, and delete rows.
To access this command...
In the context menu of a cell, choose Row
Height
Changes the height of the selected row(s).
Optimal Height
Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells. This is the default setting for new tables.
Space Rows Equally
Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
Select
Selects the row that contains the cursor.
Insert...
Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table.
Delete
Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
219 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.80. IBM Lotus Symphony
Changing the row height of tables
You can change the row height of tables in documents.
To access this command...
In the context menu of a cell, choose Row - Height
Height
Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s).
Fit to size
Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.81. IBM Lotus Symphony
Optimal Height
Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells.
This is the default setting for new tables.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Row Height
This option is only available if the table contains a row with a fixed height.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.82. IBM Lotus Symphony
Selecting the row that contains the cursor
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
220 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Selects the row that contains the cursor.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Select - Row
This option is only available if the cursor is in a table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.83. IBM Lotus Symphony
Delete Rows
Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Delete - Rows
On Table Object Bar, click
Delete Row
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.84. IBM Lotus Symphony
Spacing Rows Equally
You can adjust the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
To access the command, select the rows and click Table > Auto Fit > Distribute Rows Equally.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.85. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting column properties in a table
Set the width of columns, or select, insert, and delete columns.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
221 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
In the context menu of a cell, choose Column
Column Width...
Changes the width of the selected column(s).
Optimal width
Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells. Changing the width of a column does notaffect the width of the other columns in the table. The width of the table cannot exceed the page width.
Select
Selects the column that contains the cursor. This option is only available if the cursor is in a table.
Insert...
Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table.
Delete
Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.86. IBM Lotus Symphony
Column Width
Changes the width of the selected column(s).
To access this command...
In the context menu of a cell, choose Column - Width
Width
Columns
Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of.
Width
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
222 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.87. IBM Lotus Symphony
Optimal Width
Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells.
Changing the width of a column does not affect the width of the other columns in the table. The width of the tablecannot exceed the page width.
The change affects only selected cells. You can adjust multiple cells next to each other if you select the cellstogether.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Autofit - Optimal Column Width
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.88. IBM Lotus Symphony
Selecting the column that contains the cursor
Selects the column that contains the cursor. This option is only available if the cursor is in a table.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Select - Column
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.89. IBM Lotus Symphony
Delete Columns
Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
223 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
This command is only available if the cursor is in a table.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Delete - Columns
On Table Object Bar, click
Delete Column
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.90. IBM Lotus Symphony
Spacing Columns Equally
You can adjust the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection. The totalwidth of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
To access the command, select the columns and click Table > Auto Fit > Distribute Columns Evenly.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.91. IBM Lotus Symphony
Styles in Documents
The following information concerns Lotus® Symphony™ Documents styles that you can apply using the Style Listwindow.
If you want, you can edit the styles of the current document, and then save the document as a template. To save thedocument as template, choose File - Save to Template Organizer.
Style Type
These are the different types of formatting styles.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
224 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Style types
Name Description
ParagraphStyles
Use Paragraph Styles to format paragraphs, including the font type and size.You can also select the paragraph style to apply to the next paragraph.
Text Styles Use Text Styles to format single characters, or entire words and phrases. Ifyou want, you can nest Text Styles.
Frame Styles Use Frame Styles to format text and graphic frames.
Page Styles Use Page Styles to organize the structure of the document, and to addpage numbers. You can also specify the page style to apply to the first pagethat follows after a page break.
NumberingStyles
Use Numbering Styles to format numbered or bulleted lists.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
225 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Name Description
Style Groups
These are the style groups that you can display in the View by window.
Table 2. Style groups
Name Meaning
All Styles Displays all styles of the active style category.
Applied Styles Displays the styles (of selected category) applied in the currentdocument.
Custom Styles Displays all user-defined styles in the selected style category.
Text Styles Displays formatting styles for text.
Chapter Styles Displays formatting styles for headings.
List Styles Displays formatting styles for numbered or bulleted lists.
Index Styles Displays formatting styles for indexes.
Special RegionStyles
Displays formatting styles for headers, footers, footnotes, endnotes,tables, and captions.
ConditionalStyles
Displays the user-defined conditional styles.
Hierarchical Displays the styles in the selected category in a hierarchical list. To viewthe styles in a sublevel, click on the plus sign (+) next to the sublevelname.
Template Organizer
Use the Template Organizer dialog to copy styles from one document to another.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.92. IBM Lotus Symphony
Paragraph Style Setup
Create or modify a Paragraph Style.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Style List- Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles)
Choose Layout - Style List - open context menu Modify/New (for Paragraph Styles)
The Condition tab is only available if you create a new Paragraph Style or when youedit a conditional Style.
Condition
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
226 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Define conditions for Conditional Styles here.
Indents and Spacing
Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose File - Preferences -Symphony - Lotus® Symphony™ Documents - General , and then select a newmeasurement unit in the Settings area.
Align
Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
Text Flow
Specifies pagination options.
Font
Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
Font Effects
Specify the font effects that you want to use.
Numbering
Adds or removes numbering or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, andreset the numbering in a numbered list.
Tabs
Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
Drop Caps
Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. You can also format thefirst word of the paragraph with large type.
Asian Typography
In IBM® Lotus Symphony , set the typographic options for cells in Asian language files. To enable Asian languagesupport, choose File - Preferences... - Symphony - Language Settings - Languages , and then select the Enabled boxin the Asian language support area.
Background
Choose a background color or graphic object here.
Borders
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
227 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
In IBM Lotus Symphony Spreadsheets, set the border options for the selected cells or the current paragraph.
In IBM Lotus Symphony Documents, set the border options for the selected item or the current paragraph.
Position
In Lotus Symphony Documents, specifies the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
Asian Layout
Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose thiscommand.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.93. IBM Lotus Symphony
Character Style
Here, you can create a font style.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Style List - open context menu Modify/New (for Character Styles)
Organizer
Set the options for the selected style.
Font
Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
Font Effects
Specify the font effects that you want to use.
Background
Set the background color or graphic.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
228 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Asian Language Support
Position
Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
Asian Layout
Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose thiscommand.
Reset
Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query doesnot appear when you close the dialog.
Standard
Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values.
A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.94. IBM Lotus Symphony
Frame Style Setup
Here you can create a frame style.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Style List - Modify/New (for Frame Styles)
Choose Layout - Style List- open context menu Modify/New (for Frame Styles)
Type
Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on the page.
Options
Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
229 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Wrap
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and theobject.
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and theobject.
Background
Choose a background color or graphic object here.
Borders
In IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents, set the border options for the selected item or the current paragraph.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
Macro
Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.95. IBM Lotus Symphony
Numbering Style
Here you can create a Numbering Style. The Numbering Styles are organized in the Style List window.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Style List - open context menu Modify/New (for Numbering Styles)
When a Numbering Style is created, a name is assigned to the numbering. This is why such templates are also called"named" numberings. Unnamed numberings, which are used for direct formatting, can be created in the Bullets andNumbering dialog or with the icons of the object bar.
Organizer
Set the options for the selected style.
Bullets
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
230 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply.
Numbering
Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply.
Outline
Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list.
Position
Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list.
Options
Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels inthe list hierarchy.
Reset
Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query doesnot appear when you close the dialog.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.96. IBM Lotus Symphony
Condition
Define conditions for conditional styles here.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Style List - open context menu Modify/New - Condition tab
Conditional styles are paragraph styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, youcannot change the conditional properties of a conditional style.
Lotus® Symphony™ applies the paragraph properties of conditional styles as follows (the bold terms correspond tothe titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional style is in a Context that has an Applied Stylelinked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no style is linked to the Context, then the attributesdefined in the conditional style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship:
Open a blank Lotus Symphony document and write a short business letter with a header ( Format - Page -Header).
1.
Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New in the Style List window, and selecting all the paragraph2.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
231 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this style "Businessletter".
Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as aconditional style.
3.
In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your businessletter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style.
4.
You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styleslist box or by using Assign.
5.
Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, includingthe header, with the new "Business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you mayneed to display All Styles or Custom Styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.)
6.
The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of thedocument have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style.
The "Text body" Style was created as a conditional style. Therefore, any styles you derivefrom it can be used as conditional styles.
The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, etc.).
Conditional style
Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style.
Context
Here you can see the Lotus Symphony predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer.
Applied Style
Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context.
Styles
A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box.
Style Groups
These are the style groups that you can display in the Style List window.
Table 1. Style groups
Name Meaning
Automatic Displays styles appropriate to the current context.
All Styles Displays all styles of the active style category.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
232 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Name Meaning
Applied Styles Displays the styles (of selected category) applied in the currentdocument.
Custom Styles Displays all user-defined styles in the selected style category.
CharacterStyles
Displays formatting styles for text.
Chapter Styles Displays formatting styles for headings.
List Styles Displays formatting styles for numbered or bulleted lists.
Index Styles Displays formatting styles for indexes.
Special RegionStyles
Displays formatting styles for headers, footers, footnotes, endnotes,tables, and captions.
ConditionalStyles
Displays the user-defined conditional styles.
Hierarchical Displays the styles in the selected category in a hierarchical list. To viewthe styles in a sublevel, click on the plus sign (+) next to the sublevelname.
Remove
Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style.
Assign
Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.97. IBM Lotus Symphony
Applying formatting style
The Style List window lists available styles for you to apply to elements in your documents. You can use this windowto apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. To dock the Style List window, you can drag the title bar tothe left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the Style List window, press Ctrl, and then double-click a freespace in the Style List window, or directly drag it out. The window can be docked or can float and be placed whereyou want it.
To access the Style List window and apply a style to an element:
Click Layout > Style List or press F11 (Mac special use). You can also click the Style List icon on thesidebar.
1.
Select the text. To apply a text style to one word, click the word. To apply a paragraph style, click theparagraph.
2.
Double-click the style element in the Style list.
Style type
Different style types for choice.Paragraph Styles
Displays formatting styles for paragraphs. Use paragraph styles to apply the same formatting, such as font,numbering, and layout to the paragraphs in your document.
3.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
233 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Text Styles
Displays formatting styles for text. Use text styles to apply font styles to selected text in a paragraph.Frame Styles
Displays formatting styles for frames. Use frame styles to format frame layouts and position.Page Styles
Displays formatting styles for pages. Use page styles to determine page layouts, including the use ofheaders and footers.Numbering Styles
Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists. Use list styles to format number and bulletcharacters and to specify indentation.
Apply
Allows you to assign a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
New...
Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection. You can also clickthe dropdown to choose New Style from Selection from the submenu.
Modify...
Modifies the selected style. You can also click the downward pointing arrow to choose Update Style fromSelection from the submenu.
Fill Style
Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then draga selection in the document to apply the style. To exit this mode, click the icon again, or press Esc.
Load Style
Opens the Load Styles dialog to import styles from another document.
Note: You can undo changes to style attributes by pressing Ctrl+Z. You can redo changes to style attributes bypressing Ctrl+Y.
Related reference
Applying Styles in Fill Style ModeCopying formatting with duplicate formatting for DocumentsTemplates and StylesCreating new styles from selectionsUpdating Styles From Selections
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.98. IBM Lotus Symphony
Instant Changes
Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - Instant Changes Options .
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Instant Changes
While Typing
Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - Instant Changes
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
234 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Options, and then click the Options tab.
Apply
Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - Instant Changes Options.
Apply and Edit Changes
Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - Instant Changes Options. In a dialog,you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
Instant Changes Options
Opens the Instant Changes dialog.
To open the Instant Formatting for Tables dialog, click in a table cell, and then choose Table - Instant Formatting.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.99. IBM Lotus Symphony
While Typing
Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - Instant ChangesOptions, and then click the Options tab.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Instant Changes - While Typing
You can use Instant Changes to format text documents and plain ASCII text files, but not characters that you havemanually formatted. Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document.
To reverse the last Instant Changes action, choose Edit - Undo .
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.100. IBM Lotus Symphony
Instant Formatting for Tables
Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
235 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Table - Instant Formatting (with cursor in a table)
Applying an Instant Formatting to a Table
Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format.1.
Choose Table - Instant Formatting, and then click the format that you to want to apply.2.
Click OK.3.
Instant Formatting dialog box
Format
Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK.
Add
Adds a new table style to the list.
Format a table in your document.1.
Select the table, and then choose Table - Instant Formatting.2.
Click Add.3.
In the Add Instant Formatting dialog, enter a name, and then click OK.4.
Delete
Deletes the selected table style.
More
Displays more formatting options for tables. Click again to hide the options.
Formatting
Select the formatting attributes that you to include in the selected table style.
Number format
Includes numbering formats in the selected table style.
Font
Includes font formatting in the selected table style.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
236 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Alignment
Includes alignment settings in the selected table style.
Borders
Includes border styles in the selected table style.
Pattern
Includes background styles in the selected table style.
Rename
Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.101. IBM Lotus Symphony
Applying instant changes
Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - Instant Changes Options.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Instant Changes - Apply
Turning Off Instant Changes
When you apply automatic formats, the following rules apply:
Instant Changes for Headings
A paragraph is formatted as a heading when the following conditions are met:
paragraph begins with a capital letter1.paragraph does not end with a punctuation mark2.empty paragraph above and below the paragraph3.
Instant Changes for Bullets / Numbering
To create a bulleted list, type a hyphen (-), star (*), or plus sign (+), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of aparagraph.
To create a numbered list, type a number followed by a period (.), followed by a space or tab at the beginning of aparagraph.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
237 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Standard, Text bodyor Text body indent paragraph styles.
Instant Changes for Separator Lines
If you type three or more hyphens (---), underscores (___) or equal signs (===) on line and then press Enter, theparagraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page. The line is actually the lower border of the precedingparagraph. The following rules apply:
Three hyphens (-) yield a single line (0.05 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm).1.Three underscore (_) yield a single line (1 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm).2.Three equal signs (=) yield a double line (1.10 pt thick, gap 0.75 mm).3.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.102. IBM Lotus Symphony
Apply and Edit Changes
Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - Instant Changes Options. In a dialog,you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Instant Changes - Apply and Edit Changes
Accept All
Applies all of the formatting changes.
Reject All
Rejects all of the formatting changes.
Edit Changes
Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject Instant Changes changes. You can also view the changes made by aspecific author or on a specific date.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.103. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting text wrap options for objects
You can set the text wrap options for graphics, objects, and frames.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
238 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Wrap
No wrap
Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object,but not on the sides of the object.
Page wrap
Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
Optimal page wrap
Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distancebetween the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
Wrap through
Places the object in front of the text.
In background
Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
Contour
Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames. Tochange the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose Layout - Wrap - Edit Contour .
Edit Contour
Changes the contour of the selected object. Lotus® Symphony™ uses the contour when determining the text wrapoptions for the object.
First paragraph
Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter. The space between the paragraphs is determined bythe size of the object.
Edit
Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object. You can also specify the spacing between the text and theobject.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.104. IBM Lotus Symphony
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
239 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Merge Tables
Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separatedby an empty paragraph.
To access this command...
Choose Table - Merge Tables
If you choose this command when the cursor is in the middle of three consecutive tables, you are prompted to selectthe table that you want to merge with.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.105. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting outline numbering in documents
You can specify the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Outline Numbering
Outline numbering is linked to paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading" paragraph styles (1-10) are assigned to thecorresponding outline number levels (1-10). If you want, you can assign different paragraph styles to the outlinenumber level.
If you want numbered headings, use the Tools - Outline Numbering menu command toassign numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the toolbar.
To highlight the screen display of outline numbers, choose View - Field Shadings.
Numbering
Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
Position
Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
240 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Format
Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents.
The Format button is only available for outline numbering. For numbered or bulleted liststyles, modify the Numbering Styles of the paragraphs.
Untitled 1 - 9
Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
Save As
Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load thesesettings from another document.
Save As
Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline levelthat the styles are assigned to.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.106. IBM Lotus Symphony
Setting numbering in documents
Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
To access this command...
Choose Layout - Outline Numbering - Numbering tab
Level
Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply thenumbering options, except for the paragraph style, to all of the levels, click "1-10".
Numbering
Specify the formatting for the select outline level.
Paragraph Style
Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outlinelevel is not defined.
Number
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
241 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level.
Table 1. Numbering style options
Option Description
A, B, C, ... Capital letters
a, b, c, ... Lowercase letters
I, II, III, ... Roman numerals (upper)
i, ii, iii, ... Roman numerals (lower)
1, 2, 3, ... Arabic numerals
A,... AA,...AAA,...
Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number ofletters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in levelthree is "BBB".
a,... aa,...aaa,...
Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number ofletters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level twois "cc".
None No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separatorfields appears at the beginning of the numbered line.
Character Style
Select the format of the numbering character.
Show sublevels
Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levelsof chapter numbering: 1.1.1
Separator Before
Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1".
Separator After
Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1."
Start at
Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.107. IBM Lotus Symphony
Footnote and Endnote Settings
Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
242 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Footnote and Endnote
Footnotes
Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
Endnotes
Specifies the formatting for endnotes. The type of endnote numbering and the Styles to apply are the optionsavailable.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.108. IBM Lotus Symphony
Footnotes
Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
To access this command...
Choose Edit - Footnote and Endnote - Footnotes tab
To set additional option for footnotes and endnotes, choose Layout - Properties - PageProperties, and then click the Footnote tab.
AutoNumbering
Numbering
Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
243 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Numbering style options
Option Description
A, B, C Uppercase
a, b, c Lowercase
I, II, III Roman numerals (upper case)
i, ii, iii Roman numerals (lower case)
1, 2, 3 Arabic numerals
A,... AA,...AAA,...
Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters. After the first 26 entries,the numbering restarts at "AA".
a,... aa,...aaa,...
Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters. After the first 26 entries, thenumbering restarts at "aa".
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
244 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Option Description
Counting
Select the numbering option for the footnotes.
Table 2. Footnote options
Option Meaning
Per page Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the top of each page. This option isonly available if the End of page check box is selected in the Position area.
Per chapter Restarts the numbering of footnotes at the beginning of each chapter.
Perdocument
Numbers the footnotes in the document sequentially.
Start at
Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" inthe Counting box.
Before
Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text. For example, type "To " todisplay "To 1".
After
Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)".
Position
End of page
Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page.
End of document
Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes.
Styles
To ensure a uniform appearance for the footnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes.
Paragraph
Select the paragraph style for the footnote text.
Page
Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
245 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
This option is only available if the End of Document check box is selected in the Positionarea.
Character Styles
You can assign styles to footnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined footnote styles, or use a differentstyle.
Text area
Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document.
Footnote area
Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area.
Continuation notice
End of Footnote
Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued onPage ". Lotus® Symphony™ Documents automatically inserts the number of the following page.
Start of next page
Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued fromPage ". Lotus Symphony Documents automatically inserts the number of the previous page.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.109. IBM Lotus Symphony
Endnotes
Specifies the formatting for endnotes. The type of endnote numbering and the Styles to apply are the optionsavailable.
To access this command...
Choose Layout > Footnote and Endnote > Endnotes tab.
Instant Numbering
Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
246 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Table 1. Footnote and endnote options
Option Description
A, B, C Uppercase
a, b, c Lowercase
I, II, III Roman numerals (upper case)
i, ii, iii Roman numerals (lower case)
1, 2, 3 Arabic numerals
A,... AA,...AAA,...
Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters. After the first 26 entries,the numbering restarts at "AA".
a,... aa,...aaa,...
Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters. After the first 26 entries, thenumbering restarts at "aa".
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
247 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Option Description
Start at
Enter the number for the first endnote in the document. This is useful if want the endnote numbering to span morethan one document.
Before
Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text. For example, type "re: " todisplay "re: 1".
After
Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)".
Styles
To ensure a uniform appearance for the endnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes.
Paragraph
Select the paragraph style for the endnote text.
Page
Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes.
Character Styles
You can assign styles to endnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined endnote styles, or use a differentstyle.
Text area
Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document.
Endnote area
Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.110. IBM Lotus Symphony
Converting between text and a table
You can not only convert selected text into a table but also can convert a selected table into text. When you converttext into a table, a separator, such as a tab, marks the column boundaries in the selected text. Each paragraph in theselection is converted into a row in the table. When you convert a table into text, the column markers are changed tothe character that you specify, and each row is converted into a separate paragraph.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
248 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To convert the selected text into a table, perform the following steps:
Select the text that you want to convert and click Table > Convert > Text to Table.1.Select from the following options:2.
Table 1. Options for converting text to a table
Option Description
Tabs Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers.
Semicolons Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers.
Paragraph Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers.
Other Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the boxas a column marker.
Equal width forall columns
Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of thecolumn marker.
AutoFormat Opens the Instant Formatting window, where you can select apredefined layout for the table.
Column Header Select this check box to include the column header in the table. Youcan specify the number of column header rows for the table and haveit repeat at the top of each page.
Row label Select this check box to include the row label in the table. You canspecify the number of row label columns for the table.
Don't split table Does not divide the table across pages.
Border Adds a border to the table and the table cells.
To convert a table into text, perform the following steps:
Select the table and click Table > Convert > Table to Text.1.Select from the following options:2.
Table 2. Options for converting a table to text
Option Description
Tabs Converts the column markers to tabs.
Semicolons Converts the column markers to semi-colons (;).
Paragraph Converts the column markers to paragraphs.
Other Converts column markers into the character that you type in the box.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.111. IBM Lotus Symphony
Sort
Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
You can define up to three sort keys as well as combine alphanumeric and numeric sort keys.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
249 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Table- Sort
Sort criteria
Keys 1 to 3
Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
Column 1 to 3
Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting. The valid number range is 1 to 99.
To sort paragraphs, select the Paragraph option in the Separator area.
Key type 1 to 3
Select the sorting option that you want to use.
Order
Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
Descending
Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
Direction
Columns
Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options.
Rows
Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options.
Separator
Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act asseparators when you sort paragraphs.
Tabs
If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option.
Character
Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, Lotus®Symphony™ can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph.
...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
250 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator.
Language
Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than otherlanguages.
Match case
Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handlingapplies.
For Asian languages, select Match case to apply multi-level collation. In the multi-levelcollation, the primitive forms of the entries are first compared with the cases of the formsand diacritics ignored. If the forms are the same, the diacritics of the forms are compared.If the forms are still the same, the cases, character widths, and Japanese Kanadifferences of the forms are compared.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.112. IBM Lotus Symphony
Calculate
Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Calculate
Ctrl+ plus sign
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.113. IBM Lotus Symphony
Page Formatting
Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the StatusBar.
To access this command...
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
251 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Choose Tools - Update - Page Formatting
In long documents, updating the page formatting can take a while.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.114. IBM Lotus Symphony
Current Index
Updates the current index. The current index is the one that contains the cursor.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Update - Current Index
You can also right-click in an index or table of contents, and then choose Update Index/Table. The followingcommands are also available in the context menu:
Edit Index/Table
Edits the current index or table.
Delete Index/Table
Deletes the current index or table.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.115. IBM Lotus Symphony
All Indexes and Tables
Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index ortable before you use this command.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
252 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.116. IBM Lotus Symphony
Line Numbers
Adds or removes and formats line numbers in the current document. To exclude a paragraph from line numbering,click in the paragraph, choose
Layout - Properties - Paragraph Properties, click the Numbering tab, and then clear the Include this paragraph in linenumbering check box. You can also exclude a paragraph style from line numbering.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Line Numbers
Show numbering
Adds line numbers to the current document.
View
Set the properties of the line numbers
Character Style
Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers.
Format
Select the numbering style that you want to use.
Position
Select where you want the line numbers to appear.
Spacing
Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text.
Interval
Enter the counting interval for the line numbers.
Separator
You can enter a separator character to display between line numbers if the counting interval is more than one.
Text
Enter the text that you want to use as a separator.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
253 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
Every
Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators.
Separators are only displayed in lines that are not numbered.
Count
Specify whether to include empty paragraphs or lines in text frames in the line count.
Blank lines
Includes empty paragraphs in the line count.
Lines in text frames
Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the linecount in the main text area of the document. In linked frames, the numbering is not restarted.
Restart every new page
Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.117. IBM Lotus Symphony
Update All
Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Update - Update All
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.118. IBM Lotus Symphony
Updating the content of fields
You can update the contents of all fields in the current document.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
254 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Update - Fields
F9 key (Mac special use)
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.119. IBM Lotus Symphony
Links
Updates the links in the current document.
To access this command...
In IBM® Lotus® Symphony™ Documents, choose Tools - Update - Links
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.120. IBM Lotus Symphony
All Charts
Updates the charts in the current document.
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Update - All Charts
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.121. IBM Lotus Symphony
Update
Updates items in the current document that have dynamic contents, so as fields and indexes.
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
255 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
To access this command...
Choose Tools - Update
Update All
Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
Fields
Updates the contents of all fields in the current document.
Links
Updates the links in the current document.
Current Index
Updates the current index. The current index is the one that contains the cursor.
All Indexes and Tables
Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index ortable before you use this command.
All Charts
Updates the charts in the current document.
Page Formatting
Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the StatusBar.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.122. IBM Lotus Symphony
Working with headers and footers
Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins respectively, where you can add text or
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
256 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
images.
To add a header to a page, choose Create > Header. If your document has only one page style, headers areadded to all pages. If your document has more than one page style, clickCreate > Header, and then select thepage style on which you want to create header from the submenu. The header is added to all of the pages that usethe same page style.
To add a footer to a page, choose Create > Footer. If your document has only one page style, footers are addedto all pages. If your document has more than one page style, clickCreate > Footer, and then select the page styleon which you want to create footer from the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the samepage style.
Tips:
The page style for the current page is displayed in the status bar.1.To quickly switch between the document text and the header, or the footer and the header, press Ctrl +Page Up.
2.
To quickly switch between the header and the footer, press Ctrl + Page Down.3.
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.123. IBM Lotus Symphony
Numbering On/Off
Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs.
To define the numbering format, choose Layout - Bullets and Numbering. To display the Bullets and Numberingdialog, click the Bullets on/off icon on the Numbering Object Bar.
Numbering On/Off
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.124. IBM Lotus Symphony
Link
Links the selected frame to the next frame. The text automatically flows from one frame to another.
Link Frames
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.125. IBM Lotus Symphony
Unlink Frames
Breaks the link between two frames. You can only break the link that extends from the selected frame to the target
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
257 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
frame.
Unlink Frames
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.126. IBM Lotus Symphony
Create Row
Inserts one or more rows in the table, below the selection. You can insert more than one row by opening the dialog(choose Table - Insert - Rows), or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon. The second methodinserts rows of the same height as the originally selected rows.
Insert Row
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.127. IBM Lotus Symphony
Create Column
Inserts one or more columns into the table, after the selection. You can insert several columns at the same time byopening the dialog (choose Table - Insert - Columns), or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon. If thelatter method is used, the columns inserted will have the same relative width as the selected columns.
Insert Column
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.128. IBM Lotus Symphony
Sum function
Activates the sum function. Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear.
Lotus® Symphony™ recognizes the cell range for the sum function as long as the cells are filled with numbers. Priorto entering the data, you must enable the Number Recognition in the context menu of the table.
Click Apply to accept the sum formula as it appears in the entry line.
Sum
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
258 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM
2.25.129. IBM Lotus Symphony
Insert Unnumbered Entry
Inserts a paragraph without numbering. The existing numbering will not be affected.
Insert Unnumbered Entry
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.130. IBM Lotus Symphony
Move Up with Subpoints
Moves a paragraph with subpoints to above the previous paragraph. This is only visible when the cursor is positionedwithin numbered or bulleted text.
Move Up with Subpoints
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.131. IBM Lotus Symphony
Move Down with Subpoints
Moves a paragraph with all its subpoints below the following paragraph. This is only visible when the cursor ispositioned within numbered or bulleted text.
Move Down with Subpoints
Help Feedback | Product Feedback | Additional Documentation | Trademarks
2.25.132. IBM Lotus Symphony
Restart Numbering
Restarts the text numbering. This is only visible when the cursor is positioned within numbered or bulleted text.
Restart Numbering
IBM Lotus Symphony http://localhost:1266/help/advanced/print.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.symphony....
259 of 259 1/5/2011 6:09 PM